JP2015123151A - Slot machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a slot machine allowing a player to recognize a performance variable display part without any distinction between the performance variable display part and a game variable display part.SOLUTION: In a physical relationship between stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and reels 2C, 2R, and 2T as game reels, the stop switches 8C and 8R are disposed in a physical relationship to become a same alignment sequence as that of the corresponding reels 2C and 2R, however, the stop switch 8L is disposed in a physical relationship to become a different alignment sequence from that of the corresponding reel 2L. The reels are displayed in order of the reel 2L as a performance reel, and the reels 2C, 2R, and 2T as game reels. A first interval as an interval between a transparent window corresponding to the reel 2L and a transparent window corresponding to the reel 2C, is equal to a second interval as an interval between the transparent window corresponding to the reel 2C and a transparent window corresponding to the reel 2R. A third interval as an interval between the transparent window corresponding to the reel 2R and a transparent window corresponding to the reel 2T is different from the first interval and the second interval.

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable.

  A slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels having a plurality of types of identification information drawn as identification information on the outer periphery. First, a bet number is determined by a player's BET operation. , And the start operation is performed in a state where the prescribed bet number is set, and the rotation of the reels is started, and the rotation is stopped by operating the stop button provided corresponding to each reel. A combination of predetermined winning identification information (for example, 7-7-7, hereinafter a combination of identification information) is used on a winning line passing through a visual recognition area where the reels can be visually recognized when rotation of all the reels is stopped. (Also referred to as)) will be awarded. That is, the game is advanced by the player's operation.

  In this type of slot machine, for the purpose of fairness of the game, there are certain restrictions on the control of the game reel used for the game, but the effect reel used for the production in parallel with the game reel. By arranging the effect reel, the effect reel looks like a game reel, while the effect reel does not affect the game result, so there is no restriction on the effect reel control. There has been proposed one that can produce a higher degree of freedom using a production reel that looks like a gaming reel (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-321389 A

  In the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, in addition to a stop switch for stopping the game reel, a stop switch for stopping the effect reel is provided, and each stop switch is used for the game reel and the effect reel. Since it is provided at a position corresponding to each, the relationship between the game reel and the effect reel is clear, and it is difficult to recognize the effect reel without distinguishing it from the game reel.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a slot machine capable of recognizing an effect variable display unit without distinguishing it from a game variable display unit. .

In order to solve the above-described problem, a slot machine according to means 1 of the present invention provides:
A plurality of game variable display sections (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) that can be identified and deriving display results for games are provided.
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and all of the plurality of game variable display sections (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) One game is completed by deriving the game display result, and the game display derived to each of the plurality of game variable display sections (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) as a result of one game. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a winning can be generated according to a combination of results,
Deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving the game display result to the game variable display section (middle reel, right reel, specific reel);
When the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated, the game display result (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) corresponding to the derivation operation means is derived. A game derivation control means (main control unit 41) for controlling,
A variable display unit for production (left reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) each identifiable and deriving a display result for production,
When the derivation operation means (stop switch 8L) corresponding to a specific game variable display section (specific reel) among the plurality of game variable display sections (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) is operated, the effect A production-use derivation control means (sub-control unit 91) that performs control for deriving the production-use display result on the variable display unit (left reel);
Special control (special control) that is not executed as control related to the variable display unit for play (variation control, stop control, visual control) while the game is in progress Special control means (sub-control unit 91) for executing fluctuation control, special stop control, special visual control),
With
Game variable display units (middle reel, right reel) other than the specific game variable display unit, and derivation operation means (stop switch 8C, corresponding to the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit) 8R) is a specific positional relationship (a positional relationship in the same order as the corresponding reels),
The positional relationship between the effect variable display portion (left reel) and the derivation operation means (stop switch 8L) corresponding to the specific game variable display portion (specific reel) is the specific positional relationship (corresponding reel). The positional relationship is the same order as the order of
Special positional relationship in which the positional relationship between the specific game variable display unit (specific reel) and the derivation operation means (stop switch 8L) corresponding to the specific game variable display unit is different from the specific positional relationship (The positional relationship is different from the corresponding reel order)
Of the game variable display units other than the specific game variable display unit, a first interval that is an interval between the game variable display unit adjacent to the game variable display unit and the game variable display unit; One of the game variable display units other than the specific game variable display unit and the one of the game variable display units other than the specific game variable display unit. The second interval, which is the interval between the display unit and another adjacent game variable display unit, is the same or substantially the same (the production reel is the left reel, the game reel is the middle reel, the right reel, In the case of the reel, the first interval, which is the interval between the left reel and the middle reel, and the second interval, which is the interval between the middle reel and the right reel, are the same or substantially the same. And the gaming reels are the left reel, middle reel, and specific reel. When the a first interval is the interval center reel and the right reel, the second spacing is the distance of the middle and the left reel reel, are the same or substantially the same),
The interval between the specific game variable display section and the game variable display section adjacent to the specific game variable display section or the presentation variable display section adjacent to the specific game variable display section. 3 is different from the first interval and the second interval (when the effect reel is the left reel, the game reel is the middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel, the interval between the right reel and the specific reel is The third interval is different from the first interval and the second interval, and when the production reel is the right reel and the game reel is the left reel, the middle reel, and the specific reel, the interval between the right reel and the specific reel The third interval is different from the first interval and the second interval)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display unit for effect that executes special control that is not executed as control related to the variable display unit for game during the progress of the game, the display result for game and the variable for effect of the specific variable display unit for game The positional relationship between the display operation results for the display unit and the derived operation means operated when deriving both results is a game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit, and the specific game variable display unit. While the specific positional relationship is the same as the positional relationship with the derivation operation means operated when deriving the game display result to other game variable display units, the specific game variable display unit and the specific The positional relationship between the game display result of the game variable display unit and the deriving operation means operated when deriving both the display result for the effect display of the variable display unit for the game is different from the specific positional relationship. For a specific game When the derivation operation means operated when deriving both the game display result of the variable display part and the display result of the effect variable display part is operated, not the specific game variable display part, Since it is possible to make it appear as if the display result for the effect is derived to the effect variable display unit in a specific positional relationship with the derivation operation means, the specific game variable display unit is changed to the specific game variable display. It is possible to recognize and distinguish the game variable display unit other than the game variable display unit without distinguishing the effect variable display unit from the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit.
In addition, a first interval that is an interval between the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit and the game variable display unit adjacent to the game variable display unit, and the game variable display unit, Adjacent to one game variable display unit and one game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit, and one game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit. The second interval, which is the interval between the other matching game variable display units, is the same or substantially the same, but the specific game variable display unit and the game adjacent to the specific game variable display unit Since the third interval that is the interval between the variable display unit or the specific game variable display unit and the effect variable display unit adjacent to the variable display unit is different from the first interval and the second interval, it is specified more effectively. The game variable display section is distinguished from the game variable display section other than the specific game variable display section. To recognize Te, it is possible to recognize the effect variable display unit without distinction between gaming variable display portion other than the variable display unit for a specific game.

The slot machine according to means 2 of the present invention is:
A plurality of game variable display sections (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) that can be identified and deriving display results for games are provided.
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and all of the plurality of game variable display sections (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) One game is completed by deriving the game display result, and the game display derived to each of the plurality of game variable display sections (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) as a result of one game. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a winning can be generated according to a combination of results,
Deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving the game display result to the game variable display section (middle reel, right reel, specific reel);
When the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated, the game display result (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) corresponding to the derivation operation means is derived. A game derivation control means (main control unit 41) for controlling,
A variable display unit for production (left reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) each identifiable and deriving a display result for production,
When the derivation operation means (stop switch 8L) corresponding to a specific game variable display section (specific reel) among the plurality of game variable display sections (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) is operated, the effect A production-use derivation control means (sub-control unit 91) that performs control for deriving the production-use display result on the variable display unit (left reel);
Special control (special control) that is not executed as control related to the variable display unit for play (variation control, stop control, visual control) while the game is in progress Special control means (sub-control unit 91) for executing fluctuation control, special stop control, special visual control),
With
Game variable display units (middle reel, right reel) other than the specific game variable display unit, and derivation operation means (stop switch 8C, corresponding to the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit) 8R) is a specific positional relationship (a positional relationship in the same order as the corresponding reels),
The positional relationship between the effect variable display portion (left reel) and the derivation operation means (stop switch 8L) corresponding to the specific game variable display portion (specific reel) is the specific positional relationship (corresponding reel). The positional relationship is the same order as the order of
Special positional relationship in which the positional relationship between the specific game variable display unit (specific reel) and the derivation operation means (stop switch 8L) corresponding to the specific game variable display unit is different from the specific positional relationship (The positional relationship is different from the corresponding reel order)
Of the game variable display parts other than the specific game variable display part, the first variable display part adjacent to the effect variable display part and the effect variable display part are first intervals. An interval between the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit and another game variable display unit adjacent to the game variable display unit and the game variable display unit. The second interval is the same or substantially the same (when the production reel is the middle reel, the game reel is the left reel, the right reel, and the specific reel, the first interval is the interval between the left reel and the middle reel. The interval and the second interval, which is the interval between the middle reel and the right reel, are the same or substantially the same)
A third interval which is an interval between the specific game variable display unit and the game variable display unit adjacent to the specific game variable display unit is different from the first interval and the second interval. (When the production reel is the middle reel and the game reel is the left reel, the right reel, and the specific reel, the third interval, which is the interval between the right reel and the specific reel, is different from the first interval and the second interval. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display unit for effect that executes special control that is not executed as control related to the variable display unit for game during the progress of the game, the display result for game and the variable for effect of the specific variable display unit for game The positional relationship between the display operation results for the display unit and the derived operation means operated when deriving both results is a game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit, and the specific game variable display unit. While the specific positional relationship is the same as the positional relationship with the derivation operation means operated when deriving the game display result to other game variable display units, the specific game variable display unit and the specific The positional relationship between the game display result of the game variable display unit and the deriving operation means operated when deriving both the display result for the effect display of the variable display unit for the game is different from the specific positional relationship. For a specific game When the derivation operation means operated when deriving both the game display result of the variable display part and the display result of the effect variable display part is operated, not the specific game variable display part, Since it is possible to make it appear as if the display result for the effect is derived to the effect variable display unit in a specific positional relationship with the derivation operation means, the specific game variable display unit is changed to the specific game variable display. It is possible to recognize and distinguish the game variable display unit other than the game variable display unit without distinguishing the effect variable display unit from the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit.
In addition, a first interval that is an interval between one game variable display unit adjacent to the effect variable display unit and the effect variable display unit among the game variable display units other than the specific game variable display unit. And a second interval which is an interval between the other variable display portion for the game adjacent to the variable display portion for the effect among the variable display portions for the game other than the specific variable display portion for the game, and the variable display portion for the effect. Are the same or substantially the same, but the third interval, which is the interval between the specific game variable display unit and the game variable display unit adjacent to the specific game variable display unit, is the first Because it is different from the interval and the second interval, it is possible to recognize the specific game variable display unit more effectively than the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit, and specify the effect variable display unit. Can be recognized without distinction from the game variable display part other than the game variable display part

The slot machine according to means 3 of the present invention is:
A plurality of game variable display sections (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (designs) each identifiable and deriving a game display result, and the plurality A variable display area for games (transparent windows 3C, 3R, 3T) in which identification information (symbols) displayed on the variable display section for games (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) can be visually recognized,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and all of the plurality of game variable display sections (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) One game is completed by deriving the game display result, and the game display derived to each of the plurality of game variable display sections (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) as a result of one game. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a winning can be generated according to a combination of results,
Deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving the game display result to the game variable display section (middle reel, right reel, specific reel);
When the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated, the game display result (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) corresponding to the derivation operation means is derived. A game derivation control means (main control unit 41) for controlling,
A variable display unit for production (left reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) each identifiable and deriving a display result for production,
An effect variable display area (transparent window 3L) in which the identification information (symbol) displayed on the effect variable display section (left reel) can be visually recognized;
When the derivation operation means (stop switch 8L) corresponding to a specific game variable display section (specific reel) among the plurality of game variable display sections (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) is operated, the effect A production-use derivation control means (sub-control unit 91) that performs control for deriving the production-use display result on the variable display unit (left reel);
Special control (special control) that is not executed as control related to the variable display unit for play (variation control, stop control, visual control) while the game is in progress Special control means (sub-control unit 91) for executing fluctuation control, special stop control, special visual control),
With
Game variable display units (middle reel, right reel) other than the specific game variable display unit, and derivation operation means (stop switch 8C, corresponding to the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit) 8R) is a specific positional relationship (a positional relationship in the same order as the corresponding reels),
The positional relationship between the effect variable display portion (left reel) and the derivation operation means (stop switch 8L) corresponding to the specific game variable display portion (specific reel) is the specific positional relationship (corresponding reel). The positional relationship is the same order as the order of
Special positional relationship in which the positional relationship between the specific game variable display unit (specific reel) and the derivation operation means (stop switch 8L) corresponding to the specific game variable display unit is different from the specific positional relationship (The positional relationship is different from the corresponding reel order)
Of the game variable display parts other than the specific game variable display part, the game variable table area corresponding to the game variable display part adjacent to the effect variable display part, and the effect variable display part A variable display area for production, a first interval that is an interval between the display, and a game variable display area corresponding to one of the game variable display parts other than the specific game variable display part; The game variable display area corresponding to the other game variable display part adjacent to the one game variable display part among the game variable display parts other than the specific game variable display part. The second interval is the same or substantially the same (the interval between the see-through window 3L and the see-through window 3C when the effect reel is the left reel, the game reel is the middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel). 1 and the interval between the transparent window 3C and the transparent window 3R. The second interval is the same or substantially the same, and when the effect reel is the right reel and the game reel is the left reel, the middle reel, and the specific reel, the interval between the see-through window 3C and the see-through window 3R is The first interval and the second interval that is the interval between the transparent window 3L and the transparent window 3C are the same or substantially the same).
A game variable display area corresponding to the specific game variable display part, and a game variable display area corresponding to the game variable display part adjacent to the specific game variable display part or the specific game variable display. The third interval, which is the interval between the effect variable display area corresponding to the effect variable display portion adjacent to the portion, is different from the first interval and the second interval (the effect reel is a left reel, When the game reel is a middle reel, a right reel, and a specific reel, the third interval, which is the interval between the see-through window 3R and the see-through window 3T, is different from the first and second intervals, and the effect reel is set to the right. (When the reel is a left reel, a middle reel, and a specific reel are used as gaming reels, the third interval that is the interval between the see-through window 3R and the see-through window 3T is different from the first and second intervals)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display unit for effect that executes special control that is not executed as control related to the variable display unit for game during the progress of the game, the display result for game and the variable for effect of the specific variable display unit for game The positional relationship between the display operation results for the display unit and the derived operation means operated when deriving both results is a game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit, and the specific game variable display unit. While the specific positional relationship is the same as the positional relationship with the derivation operation means operated when deriving the game display result to other game variable display units, the specific game variable display unit and the specific The positional relationship between the game display result of the game variable display unit and the deriving operation means operated when deriving both the display result for the effect display of the variable display unit for the game is different from the specific positional relationship. For a specific game When the derivation operation means operated when deriving both the game display result of the variable display part and the display result of the effect variable display part is operated, not the specific game variable display part, Since it is possible to make it appear as if the display result for the effect is derived to the effect variable display unit in a specific positional relationship with the derivation operation means, the specific game variable display unit is changed to the specific game variable display. It is possible to recognize and distinguish the game variable display unit other than the game variable display unit without distinguishing the effect variable display unit from the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit.
Also, among the game variable display units other than the specific game variable display unit, the game variable table area corresponding to the game variable display unit adjacent to the game variable display unit, and the effect corresponding to the game variable display unit A first interval that is an interval between the game variable display area, a game variable display area corresponding to one of the game variable display parts other than the specific game variable display part, and a specific Among the game variable display portions other than the game variable display portion, the second variable display region corresponding to another game variable display portion adjacent to the one game variable display portion is a second interval. The interval is the same or substantially the same, but a specific game variable display unit, a game variable display unit adjacent to the specific game variable display unit, or an effect variable adjacent to the specific game variable display unit A third interval which is an interval between the display unit and the display unit is the first interval and Therefore, it is possible to recognize a specific game variable display unit more effectively than a game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit, and to make the effect variable display unit a specific game. It can be made to recognize without distinguishing from the game variable display part other than the variable display part for games.

The slot machine according to means 4 of the present invention is:
A plurality of game variable display sections (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (designs) each identifiable and deriving a game display result, and the plurality A variable display area for games (transparent windows 3C, 3R, 3T) in which identification information (symbols) displayed on the variable display section for games (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) can be visually recognized,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and all of the plurality of game variable display sections (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) One game is completed by deriving the game display result, and the game display derived to each of the plurality of game variable display sections (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) as a result of one game. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a winning can be generated according to a combination of results,
Deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving the game display result to the game variable display section (middle reel, right reel, specific reel);
When the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated, the game display result (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) corresponding to the derivation operation means is derived. A game derivation control means (main control unit 41) for controlling,
A variable display unit for production (left reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) each identifiable and deriving a display result for production,
An effect variable display area (transparent window 3L) in which the identification information (symbol) displayed on the effect variable display section (left reel) can be visually recognized;
When the derivation operation means (stop switch 8L) corresponding to a specific game variable display section (specific reel) among the plurality of game variable display sections (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) is operated, the effect A production-use derivation control means (sub-control unit 91) that performs control for deriving the production-use display result on the variable display unit (left reel);
Special control (special control) that is not executed as control related to the variable display unit for play (variation control, stop control, visual control) while the game is in progress Special control means (sub-control unit 91) for executing fluctuation control, special stop control, special visual control),
With
Game variable display units (middle reel, right reel) other than the specific game variable display unit, and derivation operation means (stop switch 8C, corresponding to the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit) 8R) is a specific positional relationship (a positional relationship in the same order as the corresponding reels),
The positional relationship between the effect variable display portion (left reel) and the derivation operation means (stop switch 8L) corresponding to the specific game variable display portion (specific reel) is the specific positional relationship (corresponding reel). The positional relationship is the same order as the order of
Special positional relationship in which the positional relationship between the specific game variable display unit (specific reel) and the derivation operation means (stop switch 8L) corresponding to the specific game variable display unit is different from the specific positional relationship (The positional relationship is different from the corresponding reel order)
Among the game variable display parts other than the specific game variable display part, a game variable table area corresponding to one game variable display part adjacent to the effect variable display part, and the effect variable display part The first interval that is the interval between the corresponding effect variable display areas, and another game variable adjacent to the effect variable display portion of the game variable display portions other than the specific game variable display portion. The second interval that is the interval between the game variable table area corresponding to the display unit and the effect variable display region corresponding to the effect variable display unit is the same or substantially the same (the effect reel is When the middle reel and the game reel are the left reel, the right reel, and the specific reel, the first interval that is the interval between the see-through window 3L and the see-through window 3C, and the second interval that is the interval between the see-through window 3C and the see-through window 3R. Are the same or substantially the same)
The third is an interval between the game variable display area corresponding to the specific game variable display part and the game variable display area corresponding to the game variable display part adjacent to the specific game variable display part. Is different from the first interval and the second interval (when the production reel is the middle reel, the game reel is the left reel, the right reel, and the specific reel, the perspective window 3R and the perspective window 3T The third interval which is the interval is different from the first interval and the second interval)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display unit for effect that executes special control that is not executed as control related to the variable display unit for game during the progress of the game, the display result for game and the variable for effect of the specific variable display unit for game The positional relationship between the display operation results for the display unit and the derived operation means operated when deriving both results is a game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit, and the specific game variable display unit. While the specific positional relationship is the same as the positional relationship with the derivation operation means operated when deriving the game display result to other game variable display units, the specific game variable display unit and the specific The positional relationship between the game display result of the game variable display unit and the deriving operation means operated when deriving both the display result for the effect display of the variable display unit for the game is different from the specific positional relationship. For a specific game When the derivation operation means operated when deriving both the game display result of the variable display part and the display result of the effect variable display part is operated, not the specific game variable display part, Since it is possible to make it appear as if the display result for the effect is derived to the effect variable display unit in a specific positional relationship with the derivation operation means, the specific game variable display unit is changed to the specific game variable display. It is possible to recognize and distinguish the game variable display unit other than the game variable display unit without distinguishing the effect variable display unit from the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit.
Also, it corresponds to the game variable table area corresponding to one game variable display part adjacent to the effect variable display part among the game variable display parts other than the specific game variable display part, and the effect variable display part A first interval which is an interval between the effect variable display area and the other game variable display unit adjacent to the effect variable display unit among the game variable display units other than the specific game variable display unit. A corresponding game variable table area, a game variable display area corresponding to a specific game variable display part, and a game variable display area corresponding to a game variable display part adjacent to the specific game variable display part Since the third interval, which is the interval of, is different from the first interval and the second interval, it is possible to more effectively display the specific game variable display unit and the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit. The display variable display for production is made variable for specific games. It can be recognized without distinction between gaming variable display unit other than the radical 113.

It is to be noted that executing special control that is not executed as control related to the game variable display unit while the game is in progress as the control related to the effect variable display unit during the game in the means 1 to 4 It is composed of stages, and in the state where the game can be shifted to the next stage by the player's operation, etc., and in the state where the game control is proceeding to shift to the next stage, the game variable in such a state A state in which the control different from the control that can be executed as the control related to the display unit is executed, and the progress of the game is delayed to the next stage due to invalidation of the player's operation, etc. However, it is not excluded that the control that can be executed as the control relating to the game variable display unit is executed as the special control.
In addition, in the means 1 to 4, the control related to the game variable display unit includes the fluctuation control of the game variable display unit, the derivation control when the display result is derived by the game variable display unit, and the visual recognition of the game variable display unit. This includes visual control that changes the aspect.
In addition, in the means 1 to 4, the positional relationship between the game variable display unit or the production variable display unit and the corresponding derivation operation unit corresponds to the arrangement order of the game variable display unit or the production variable display unit. The relationship between the order of the derivation operation means to be performed, the distance between the game variable display section or the production variable display section and the corresponding derivation operation means, and the like.

The slot machine according to means 5 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The identification information that fluctuates in the specific game variable display section includes specific identification information,
The identification information that varies in the game variable display section other than the specific game variable display section and the identification information that varies in the effect variable display section do not include the specific identification information.
According to this feature, only the identification information that fluctuates in the specific game variable display section includes the specific identification information, so that the specific game variable display section is displayed as a game variable display other than the specific game variable display section. The effect variable display unit can be recognized without being distinguished from the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit.

The slot machine according to means 6 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The identification information that varies in the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit and the identification information that varies in the effect variable display unit include common identification information.
According to this feature, since the identification information that fluctuates in the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit includes common identification information, the effect variable display unit is other than the specific game variable display unit. It can be recognized without distinction from the game variable display section.

The slot machine according to means 7 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
Game medium detecting means (inserted medal sensor 31) for detecting the inserted game medium (medal);
Game value storage means (credit counter) for storing a game value (credit) that can be used for setting the number of bets in response to a betting operation (operation of the MAXBET switch 6);
Bet number storage means (BET counter) for storing the bet number set for one game;
The betting number stored in the betting number storage means (BET counter) and the gaming value storage means (credit counter) are stored in accordance with the detection result by the gaming medium detection means (inserted medal sensor 31). A game medium detection updating means (main control unit 41) for updating any of the gaming value (credit);
When a re-game winning (re-game player) is generated, the bet-number storage means (BET counter) is stored so that the next game can be started without using the gaming value (medals, credits). Re-game derivation update means (main control unit 41) for updating the number of bets placed;
Delay control means (main control unit 41) for performing delay control (repfreeze) for delaying the timing at which the next game can be started until a release condition is satisfied after a re-game winning (re-gamer) occurs;
With
The release condition is satisfied when the detection result by the game medium detecting means (inserted medal sensor 31) becomes a release result (a medal is detected by a specific sensor),
The game medium detection time update means includes:
After the game has ended without a re-game winning (re-gamer) occurring, the game medium detecting means (inserted medal sensor 31) detects the game medium (medal), whereby the betting number storage means (BET When the bet number stored in the counter) is less than the predetermined upper limit number (3), the bet number stored in the bet number storage means (BET counter) is updated to the upper limit number (3). A first game medium detection time update means for updating the game value (credit) stored in the game value storage means (credit counter) when reaching,
After the re-game winning (re-game player) occurs, the bet-number stored in the bet-number storage means (BET counter) is updated by the re-game derivation update means so that the next game can be started. Thereafter, when the game medium (medal) is detected by the game medium detecting means (inserted medal sensor 31), the game value (credit) stored in the game value storage means (credit counter) is updated. Updating means for detecting the second game medium;
It is characterized by including.
According to this feature, even after a re-game win has occurred, the inserted game medium is detected after the bet number is updated by the re-game derivation update means and the next game can be started. The game value can be updated according to the game medium. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the game value from being updated before the betting amount is set after the re-game winning is generated. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player after the re-game winning is generated without causing a sense of incongruity. Further, after the re-game winning is generated, the delay control is performed, the game medium is inserted, and the detection result by the game medium detecting means becomes the release result, so that the delay control is released. As a result, even if the number of bets is updated due to a re-game winning for the player, the next game cannot be started unless the game medium is inserted, and the game medium is inserted. You can make it seem as if the next game can be started.

A slot machine according to means 8 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
Game medium detecting means (inserted medal sensor 31) for detecting the inserted game medium (medal);
Game value storage means (credit counter) for storing a game value (credit) that can be used for setting the number of bets in response to a betting operation (operation of the MAXBET switch 6);
Bet number storage means (BET counter) for storing the bet number set for one game;
The betting number stored in the betting number storage means (BET counter) and the gaming value storage means (credit counter) are stored in accordance with the detection result by the gaming medium detection means (inserted medal sensor 31). A game medium detection updating means (main control unit 41) for updating any of the gaming value (credit);
When a re-game winning (re-game player) is generated, the bet-number storage means (BET counter) is stored so that the next game can be started without using the gaming value (medals, credits). Re-game derivation update means (main control unit 41) for updating the number of bets placed;
Delay control means (main control unit 41) for performing delay control (repfreeze) for delaying the timing at which the next game can be started until a release condition is satisfied after a re-game winning (re-gamer) occurs;
With
The release condition is satisfied when the detection result by the game medium detecting means (inserted medal sensor 31) becomes a release result (a medal is detected by a specific sensor),
The game medium detection time update means includes:
After the game has ended without a re-game winning (re-gamer) occurring, the game medium detecting means (inserted medal sensor 31) detects the game medium (medal), whereby the betting number storage means (BET When the bet number stored in the counter) is less than the predetermined upper limit number (3), the bet number stored in the bet number storage means (BET counter) is updated to the upper limit number (3). A first game medium detection time update means for updating the game value (credit) stored in the game value storage means (credit counter) when reaching,
After the re-game winning (re-game player) is generated, the game medium detection means after the re-game derivation update means starts updating the bet number stored in the bet number storage means (BET counter). When the game medium (medal) is detected by the (inserted medal sensor 31), the game value (credit) stored in the game value storage means (credit counter) is updated. Means,
It is characterized by including.
According to this feature, even after the re-game winning is generated, the inserted game medium is a game medium detected after the start of renewal of the betting amount by the re-game derivation update means. Thus, the game value can be updated according to the game medium. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the game value from being updated before the betting amount is set after the re-game winning is generated. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player after the re-game winning is generated without causing a sense of incongruity. Further, after the re-game winning is generated, the delay control is performed, the game medium is inserted, and the detection result by the game medium detecting means becomes the release result, so that the delay control is released. As a result, even if the number of bets is updated due to a re-game winning for the player, the next game cannot be started unless the game medium is inserted, and the game medium is inserted. You can make it seem as if the next game can be started.

In addition, the upper limit number in the means 7 and 8 may be a predetermined number, may be a single number, or may be a number determined according to the gaming state being controlled. . In addition, in the means 7 and 8, the upper limit number may be the same as the predetermined number at which the game can be started or may be larger than the predetermined number.
In addition, a game medium whose game value can be updated after the re-game winning is generated in the means 7 is updated after the betting number stored in the betting number storage means is updated by the re-game derivation updating means. For example, the game medium detected after the game can be started may be used. For example, the betting number stored in the betting number storage unit is updated by the re-game derivation updating unit and the next game is updated. It may be a game medium detected after a predetermined condition (e.g., elapse of a predetermined period, completion of a predetermined process, etc.) is established after the start is possible.
In addition, for the game media whose game value can be updated after the re-game winning is generated in the means 8, the betting number stored in the betting number storage means is started to be updated by the re-game derivation updating means. Any game medium detected after the start may be used. For example, a predetermined condition (elapse of a predetermined period, after the update of the betting number stored in the betting number storage unit is started by the re-game derivation update unit, It may be a game medium detected after the completion of the predetermined process.
In addition, in the means 7 and 8, the detection result of the game medium detecting means for updating either the bet number or the game value by the update means at the time of detecting the game medium (hereinafter also referred to as update result) and the release condition are satisfied. The release result may be the detection result of the same detection means as long as it is a detection result of the detection means for detecting the inserted game medium, and it is determined whether or not the release result is an update result. Whether the detection result of the same detection means as the detection means for the detection, the detection results of some of the detection means for determining whether or not the result for the update, or the update result It may be a detection result of a detection means different from the detection means for determining the above.

The slot machine according to means 9 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 8,
In the game variable display section (middle reel, right reel, specific reel), the identification information (design) is arranged by stepping motors (reel motors 32C, 32R, 32T) that are driven based on phase signals (phase signals). The display can be changed by moving the display band (game reel).
The slot machine is awarded according to the game display result derived from the game variable display section (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) (stop mode derived when the stop operation is valid). A winning determination means (a winning determination based on a combination of symbols stopped on the winning line LN) for determining whether or not
The game derivation control means includes:
Phase signal control means for controlling the phase signal (phase signal) (reel motor drive control by the main control unit 41);
The game variable display section (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) fluctuates, and the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) are involved in a predetermined state (stop operation is effective) When the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated in the state, the game display result (stop operation is performed on the game variable display section (middle reel, right reel, specific reel)). Derivation control means (a stop control based on a stop operation effective as an operation for advancing the game) for deriving a stop mode derived in an effective state);
The derivation operation in a delay state (freeze state) in which the game variable display section (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) is fluctuating and the transition to the predetermined state (stop operation is valid) is delayed. When the means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) are operated, a temporary display result (in the freeze state) that is not subject to determination by the winning determination means on the game variable display section (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) A temporary derivation control means (a stop control based on the operation of the stop switch in the frozen state) for deriving the derived stop mode);
Including
The phase signal control means includes
When the game display result (stop mode derived when the stop operation is valid) is derived to the game variable display section (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) by the derivation control means, the phase signal (Phase signal) is not changed over a predetermined period (500 ms),
When the temporary display result (stop mode derived in the freeze state) is derived to the game variable display section (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) by the temporary deriving control means, the phase signal (phase signal) The phase signal (phase signal) is always changed before the predetermined period (500 ms) elapses after the state does not change.
According to this feature, when the derivation operation means is operated in a state where the game variable display unit is fluctuating, and a game display result for determining whether or not a prize is received is derived in the game variable display unit, the phase signal Is not changed for a predetermined period or more, while the derivation operation means is operated in a state where the game variable display portion is fluctuating, and a temporary display result that is not subject to winning determination is derived to the game variable display portion. Sometimes, the phase signal is always changed before the predetermined period elapses after the phase signal does not change, so that when the game display result or the temporary display result is derived along with the operation of the derivation operation means, the game It is possible to make the player clearly recognize whether it is a display result for a game derived as a result of the above or a temporary display result derived as an effect.

The slot machine according to means 10 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 9,
In the game variable display section (middle reel, right reel, specific reel), the identification information (design) is arranged by stepping motors (reel motors 32C, 32R, 32T) that are driven based on phase signals (phase signals). The display can be changed by moving the display band (game reel).
The slot machine is awarded according to the game display result derived from the game variable display section (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) (stop mode derived when the stop operation is valid). A winning determination means (a winning determination based on a combination of symbols stopped on the winning line LN) for determining whether or not
The game derivation control means includes:
Phase signal control means for controlling the phase signal (phase signal) (reel motor drive control by the main control unit 41);
The game variable display section (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) fluctuates, and the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) are involved in a predetermined state (stop operation is effective) When the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated in the state, the game display result (stop operation is performed on the game variable display section (middle reel, right reel, specific reel)). Derivation control means (a stop control based on a stop operation effective as an operation for advancing the game) for deriving a stop mode derived in an effective state);
The derivation operation in a delay state (freeze state) in which the game variable display section (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) is fluctuating and the transition to the predetermined state (stop operation is valid) is delayed. When the means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) are operated, a temporary display result (in the freeze state) that is not subject to determination by the winning determination means on the game variable display section (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) A first temporary derivation control means (a stop control based on the operation of the stop switch in the freeze state) for deriving the derived stop mode);
When the operation means (start switch 7) different from the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated in the delay state (freeze state), the game variable display section (middle reel, right reel) Second temporary derivation control means (stop control based on operation of the start switch 7 in the freeze state) for deriving the temporary display result (a stop mode derived in the freeze state) to the specific reel);
Including
The phase signal control means includes
When the game display result (stop mode derived when the stop operation is valid) is derived to the game variable display section (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) by the derivation control means, the phase signal (Phase signal) is not changed over a predetermined period (500 ms),
When the first temporary derivation control means derives the temporary display result (stop mode derived in the freeze state) on the game variable display section (middle reel, right reel, specific reel), the phase signal ( The phase signal (phase signal) must be changed before the predetermined period (500 ms) has elapsed since the phase signal) has not changed.
When the second temporary derivation control means derives the temporary display result (a stop mode derived in a freeze state) on the game variable display section (middle reel, right reel, specific reel), the phase signal ( The phase signal is not changed for a predetermined period (500 ms) or longer.
According to this feature, when the derivation operation means is operated in a state where the game variable display unit is fluctuating, and a game display result for determining whether or not a prize is received is derived in the game variable display unit, the phase signal The derivation operation means is operated in a state where the game variable display section is fluctuating while the game variable display section is fluctuated, and a temporary display result that is not subject to winning determination is derived in the game variable display section. The phase signal is always changed before the predetermined period elapses after the phase signal does not change, and the operation means other than the derivation operation means are operated in a state where the game variable display section is fluctuating. When a temporary display result that is not the target of winning determination is derived in the game variable display section, the phase signal is not changed for a predetermined period or longer. For this reason, when a game display result or a temporary display result is derived in accordance with the operation of the derivation operation means, is it a game display result derived as a game result or a temporary display result derived as an effect? Can be clearly recognized by the player, while the temporary display result is derived in accordance with the operation of the operation means other than the derivation operation means, that is, the operation means other than the derivation operation means is operated. In a situation where it is clear whether it is a display result for a game derived as a game result or a temporary display result derived as an effect, the temporary display result is stopped for a predetermined period or more as an effect. The derived temporary display result can be surely recognized.

  In the means 9 and 10, the predetermined period is a period until the predetermined time elapses, a period until the number of executions of interrupt processing periodically executed at regular intervals reaches a predetermined value, and the like. Applicable.

The slot machine according to means 11 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 10,
A game variable display area (transparent windows 3C, 3R, 3T) in which identification information (symbols) displayed on the plurality of game variable display parts (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) can be visually recognized;
An effect variable display area (transparent window 3L) in which the identification information (symbol) displayed on the effect variable display section (left reel) can be visually recognized;
With
The shape of the game variable display area (transparent window 3C, 3R) corresponding to the game variable display part (middle reel, right reel) other than the specific game variable display part, and the effect variable display area (transparent window) 3L) is the same shape,
The shape of the game variable display area (the transparent windows 3C, 3R) corresponding to the game variable display part (middle reel, right reel) other than the specific game variable display part, and the specific game variable display part ( The game variable display area (transparent window 3T) corresponding to the specific reel is different in shape.
According to this feature, the shape of the game variable display area corresponding to the game variable display part other than the specific game variable display part is the same as the shape of the effect variable display area. The shape of the game variable display area corresponding to the game variable display part other than the specific game variable display part is different from the shape of the game variable display area corresponding to the specific game variable display part. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively recognize a specific game variable display unit from a game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit and recognize the effect variable display unit as a specific game variable display unit. It can be made to recognize without distinguishing from other game variable display parts.

The slot machine according to means 12 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 11,
The game variable display section (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) includes a pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before the game display result is derived,
The game derivation control means includes:
It is determined that the specific winning (watermelon) is allowed to be generated by the pre-determining means, and at least one game variable display unit (medium) other than the specific game variable display unit in a state where the game can proceed. When the derivation operation means (stop switches 8C, 8R) corresponding to the reels and the right reels are operated at a specific timing (timing at which the constituent symbols become the drawing range), the game variable display section (the middle reel, the right reel) ) To derive a display result for a game that allows the specific winning (watermelon), and when operated at a timing other than the specific timing (a timing at which the constituent symbols are outside the pull-in range), (The middle reel, the right reel) is controlled so as not to derive the display result for the game that allows the specific winning (watermelon),
It is determined that the specific winning (watermelon) is allowed to be generated by the pre-determining means, and a derivation operating means corresponding to the specific game variable display section (specific reel) in a state where the game can proceed ( When the stop switch 8L) is operated, regardless of the timing at which the derivation operation means is operated, the display for gaming that allows the specific winning (watermelon) to occur in the specific game variable display section (specific reel) It is characterized by control that derives the results.
According to this feature, when it is determined that the occurrence of the specific winning is permitted, the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit performs the specific winning according to the timing at which the corresponding derivation operation means is operated. In the specific game variable display section, a specific winning is always generated regardless of the timing when the corresponding derivation operation means is operated. When the derivation operation means operated when deriving the display result to both of the variable display parts for operation is operated, not for the specific game variable display part but for the production having a specific positional relationship with the derivation operation means In the configuration in which the display result is recognized as being derived by the variable display unit, it is possible to enhance the interest by operating the derivation operation means while preventing the player from being disadvantaged. Kill.

The slot machine according to means 13 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 12,
The special control means is configured such that the game variable display unit (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) is not performed on the game variable display unit (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) while the game is in progress. ) Or a special derivation mode that is not performed in the game variable display unit (middle reel, right reel, specific reel) during the progress of the game. It is characterized in that at least one of the special derivation control for deriving the effect display result is executed as the special control.
According to this feature, in the configuration in which the effect variable display unit is recognized without being distinguished from the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit, the game variable display unit is performed while the game is in progress. Special variation control that varies the production variable display unit during the game in a special variation mode, or the production variable display unit in a special derivation mode that is not performed in the game variable display unit during the game Since control for deriving the display result for performance is performed, the variable display unit for gaming can be recognized as changing in a special variation mode without being restricted by the control like the variable display unit for gaming. The game variable display unit can recognize the display result as derived in a special derivation manner.

A slot machine according to means 14 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 13,
In the special control means, the visual aspect of the effect variable display section (left reel) during the game is different from the visual aspect of the game variable display section (middle reel, right reel) during the game. It is characterized in that special visual control that makes a special visual aspect is executed as the special control.
According to this feature, in the configuration in which the effect variable display unit is recognized without being distinguished from the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit, the visual aspect of the effect variable display unit during the game is changed. Since the special visual control is performed in a special visual mode different from the visual mode of the game variable display unit during the game, the game can be used without any restrictions on performance as in the game variable display unit. It can be made to recognize that the production | generation which makes the visual recognition aspect of a variable display part the special visual recognition aspect is performed.

A slot machine according to means 15 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 14,
When a specific event (a winning combination of a role) occurs, the visual display mode of the specific game variable display unit (specific reel) is not changed, and the game variable display unit (medium reel) other than the specific game variable display unit , Right reel) and a specific notification means (winning notification effect) for notifying the occurrence of the specific event (winning prize) by changing the visual aspect of the effect variable display section (left reel). It is characterized by providing.
According to this feature, when a specific event occurs, the visual display of the specific game variable display unit is not changed, and the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit and the effect variable display unit Since the fact that a specific event has occurred is notified by changing the visual recognition mode, the specific game variable display unit is more effectively recognized separately from the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit. Thus, the effect variable display portion can be recognized without being distinguished from the game variable display portions other than the specific game variable display portion.

The slot machine according to means 16 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 15,
Visibility difficulty-imparting means (liquid crystal display 51) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the identification information (design) displayed on the variable display unit for production (left reel),
The special control means controls the identification information (symbol) displayed on the effect variable display section (left reel) by the visual recognition difficulty means (liquid crystal display 51) during the game to be difficult to visually recognize. It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the configuration in which the effect variable display unit is recognized without being distinguished from the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit, the effect variable display is performed by the visual recognition difficulty unit during the progress of the game. Since the identification information displayed on the part may be controlled so that it is difficult to visually recognize, the game variable display part can be displayed during the progress of the game without being restricted by the effects as the game variable display part. The displayed identification information can be recognized as being difficult to visually recognize.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of the game reel and the effect reel. It is a figure which shows the structure of a winning line and an invalid line. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel display window. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship of a reel display window and a stop switch. It is a figure which shows the structure of LED arrange | positioned on the back surface of the game reel and the effect reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a main control part. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of special combination, the symbol combination of special combination, and a special combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of small combination, the symbol combination of a small combination, and a small combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of re-game player, the symbol combination of a re-game player, and a re-game player. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of re-game player, the symbol combination of a re-game player, and a re-game player. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of re-game player, the symbol combination of a re-game player, and a re-game player. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a gaming state. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of a game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the combination which a prize is permitted by a lottery object combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the combination which a prize is permitted by a lottery object combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of several small part winning. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of several small part winning. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of several re-game player winning. It is a figure which shows the relationship between control of the main control part according to progress of a game, and control of a sub control part. It is a timing chart which shows the operation state of the reel for games and the reel for production according to progress of a game. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement aspect of the reel for game and the reel for production according to progress of a game. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement aspect of the reel for game and the reel for production according to progress of a game. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement aspect of the reel for game and the reel for production according to progress of a game. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement aspect of the reel for game and the reel for production according to progress of a game. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement aspect of the reel for games, the reel for presentation, and a liquid crystal display according to progress of a game. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement aspect of the reel for games, the reel for presentation, and a liquid crystal display according to progress of a game. It is a figure which shows the visual recognition aspect of the reel for production | presentation according to the lighting aspect of LED. It is a figure which shows the modification of the symbol arrangement | sequence of the game reel and the effect reel. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game process which a main control part performs after a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reply freeze process which a main control part performs within a BET process. It is a figure for demonstrating the timing which bet number setting and credit addition are accept | permitted after completion | finish of a game. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the timing at which bet number setting and credit addition are accept | permitted after the game completion | finish. It is a figure which shows the flow of control of the main control part and sub control part accompanying a freeze state. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation condition of the reel in the 1st step which comprises a freeze state, and the display condition of a liquid crystal display. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation condition of the reel in the 1st step which comprises a freeze state, and the display condition of a liquid crystal display. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation condition of the reel in the 2nd step which comprises a freeze state, and the display condition of a liquid crystal display in the completion | finish stage. It is a timing chart which shows the operation situation of each part at the time of non-execution of freeze. It is a timing chart which shows the operation condition of each part at the time of freeze execution. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the operation condition of each part at the time of freeze execution. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel motor. It is a timing chart which shows the excitation situation of the reel motor at the time of acceleration. It is a timing chart which shows the excitation situation of the reel motor at the time of stop control.

  A mode for carrying out a slot machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

  Embodiment 1 of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1, a slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a housing 1a whose front surface is open and a housing 1a. And a front door 1b pivotally supported at the side end.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, reels 2L, 2C, 2R, 2T (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, Right reel, also called a specific reel) are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 1, among the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols out of the arranged symbols can be seen from the perspective windows 3L, 3C, and 3R provided on the front door 1b, respectively. Are arranged. Further, the reel 2T is arranged so that one of the arranged symbols can be seen from the see-through window 3T provided on the front door 1b.

  As shown in FIG. 3, “red 7”, “blue 7”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “watermelon”, “cherry a”, “cherry” are respectively provided on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2C, 2R, 2T. A plurality of types of mutually distinguishable symbols such as “b”, “bell”, “replay”, and “plum” are drawn in a predetermined order. The reels 2C, 2R, and 2T are all reels having the same width and the same diameter, and the number of symbols arranged is the same 21. On the other hand, the symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2C and 2R are displayed on the upper, middle and lower three stages in the see-through windows 3C and 3R provided in the approximate center of the front door 1b, whereas the symbols of the reel 2T Only one symbol is displayed on the outer peripheral portion in the see-through window 3T provided on the side of the see-through window 3R of the front door 1b.

  In the following, “red 7”, “blue 7” and “white 7” may be collectively referred to as “7”, and “cherry a” and “cherry b” may be simply referred to as “cherry”. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the outer periphery of the reel 2L, as in the reels 2C, 2R, and 2T, “red 7”, “blue 7”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “watermelon”, “ A plurality of identifiable symbols such as “cherry a”, “cherry b”, “bell”, “replay”, and “plum” are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer periphery of these reels 2L are the same as the symbols drawn on the reels 2C, 2R, and 2T. The reel 2L is a reel having the same width and diameter as the reels 2C, 2R, and 2T, and the number of symbols arranged is 21, which is the same as the reels 2C, 2R, and 2T. The symbols drawn on the outer periphery of the reel 2L are displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3L provided at the approximate center of the front door 1b, as with the symbols drawn on the outer periphery of the reels 2C and 2R. The

  Further, as will be described later, the reels 2T, 2C, and 2R are reels used for gaming, whereas the reel 2L is a reel that is used for production, so the reels 2T, 2C, and 2R are used as gaming reels. The reel 2L may be referred to as a production reel.

  The reels 2C and 2R are rotated by reel motors 32C and 32R (see FIG. 8) provided in correspondence with each other, so that the symbols of the reels 2C and 2R are displayed while continuously changing in the see-through windows 3C and 3R. On the other hand, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2C and 2R, three continuous symbols are derived and displayed as display results in the see-through windows 3C and 3R. Further, the reel 2T is rotated by a correspondingly provided reel motor 32T (see FIG. 8), so that the design of the reel 2T is displayed while continuously changing on the see-through window 3T, while the reel 2T Is stopped, one symbol is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3T as a display result.

  Further, the reel 2L is rotated by a correspondingly provided reel motor 32L (see FIG. 8), so that the symbols of the reel 2L are continuously displayed on the see-through window 3L in the same manner as the reels 2C and 2R. On the other hand, when the rotation of the reel 2L is stopped, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed as display results in the see-through window 3L as in the reels 2C and 2R.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the see-through windows 3L, 3C, and 3R on which the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed have the same shape and are formed in a vertically long, substantially rectangular shape, whereas the reels 2T Unlike the shape of the see-through windows 3L, 3C, 3R, the see-through window 3T is displayed in a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape.

  The length in the vertical direction (A in the figure) of the see-through window 3T is shorter than the length (B) in the vertical direction of the see-through windows 3L, 3C, 3R, and the length in the horizontal direction (C in the figure). ) Is shorter than the lateral lengths (D in the figure) of the see-through windows 3L, 3C, 3R, that is, the see-through window 3T is formed to be smaller than the see-through windows 3L, 3C, 3R. Has been.

  Further, the separation width of the reel 2L and the reel 2C (a in the figure), the separation width of the reel 2C and the reel 2R (b in the figure), and the separation width of the reel 2R and the reel 2T (c in the figure) are the same width. On the other hand, the separation width (d in the figure) of the see-through window 3L and the see-through window 3C is the same width as the separation width of the see-through window 3C and the see-through window 3R (e in the figure). The separation width (f in the figure) is positioned to be wider than the separation width (d in the figure) between the see-through window 3L and the see-through window 3C and the separation width between the see-through window 3C and the see-through window 3R (e in the figure). The see-through windows 3L, 3C, 3R, and 3T are formed.

  Further, as described above, in the perspective window 3T, the symbol of the reel 2T is displayed for only one symbol, but the position of the symbol displayed in the perspective window 3T is displayed in the middle in the perspective windows 3L, 3C, and 3R. And the position of the symbol displayed in the lower stage, and a position shifted by 0.5 symbols.

  Inside the reels 2C, 2R, and 2T, reel sensors 33C, 33R, and 33T (see FIG. 8) that detect the respective reference positions of the reels 2C, 2R, and 2T are provided. Further, a reel sensor 33L (see FIG. 8) for detecting the reference position of the reel 2L is also provided inside the reel 2L, similarly to the reels 2C, 2R, and 2T.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, inside the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and 2T, reel LEDs 55L, 55C, 55R, and 55T that are irradiated with white visible light from the back of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and 2T are provided. Is provided. The reel LEDs 55L, 55C, and 55R are composed of three LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols that are visible from the perspective windows 3L, 3C, and 3R of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol is irradiated independently. It is possible. Further, the reel LED 55T is composed of one LED corresponding to one symbol visible from the see-through window 3T of the reel 2T, and can emit the symbol.

  Further, on the inner side of the reel 2L, a black light LED 56 for irradiating ultraviolet rays from the back surface of the reel 2L is provided, and the black light LED 56 corresponds to three consecutive symbols visible from the see-through window 3L of the reel 2L. It consists of individual LEDs, and each pattern can be irradiated independently. Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), a part of the reel 2L has a special transmission area (in FIG. 33 (b)) different from the transmission area formed in the pattern shown in FIG. 3 or FIG. 33 (a). In addition, a “7” symbol area having a size corresponding to three normal symbols) is formed, and a fluorescent paint is applied to the entire special transmission region. For this reason, in the lighting state of the reel LED 55L, the symbol corresponding to the special transmission area is not conspicuous, and only the normal symbol is displayed conspicuously, while the reel LED 55L is turned off and the black light LED 56 is turned on. As a result, the normal symbol is not conspicuous, and only the symbol corresponding to the special transmission region is conspicuous.

  A display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) is arranged at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, 2T of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a transmissive liquid crystal panel in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and a transmissive region 51b corresponding to the transparent windows 3L, 3C, 3R, and 3T of the display region 51a. , 51c and the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and 2T can be visually recognized from the player side through the perspective windows 3L, 3C, 3R, and 3T. In addition, a light guide plate (not shown) for irradiating the display area 51a from the back surface side is provided on the back surface of the display area 51a, and further on the back surface, the transmission areas 51b and 51c of the display area 51a. A concealing member (not shown) for concealing the inside is provided in a region excluding. The liquid crystal display 51 is a display device that can change the display mode by controlling the liquid crystal element in either a state in which light irradiated by the light guide plate is allowed to pass or a state in which the light is not allowed to pass through.

  As shown in FIG. 1, on the front door 1b, there are a medal insertion portion 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value). In the range, the maximum bet number among the specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state (in this embodiment, the normal gaming state described later, 3 as the specified number in the inside, as the specified number of CB 2) The MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting, the medals stored as credits and the medals used for setting the bet amount are settled (the medals used for setting the credit and bet number are returned). Check switch 10 operated when starting, start switch 7 operated when starting the game, stop switch operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2T, 2C, 2R, respectively L, 8C, 8R are each provided so as to be operated by the player.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the stop switch 8L is also used for an operation when stopping the rotation of the reel 2L that is an effect reel. As shown in FIG. 6, in the positional relationship between the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R and the reels 2C, 2R, and 2T, the stop switches 8C and 8R have the same arrangement order as the corresponding reels 2C and 2R. Whereas the stop switches 8L are arranged in a positional relationship, the stop switches 8L are arranged in a positional relationship that is different from the arrangement order of the corresponding reels 2T. That is, in the positional relationship between the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R and the reels 2C, 2R, and 2T, the stop switches 8C and 8R are arranged in a positional relationship that does not intersect the wirings w and y with the corresponding reels 2C and 2R. On the other hand, the stop switch 8L has a position where the connection z between the corresponding reel 2T and the connection w between the stop switch 8C and the corresponding reel 2C or the connection y between the stop switch 8R and the corresponding reel 2R. Arranged in a relationship. On the other hand, in the positional relationship between the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the stop switch 8L has the same arrangement order as the corresponding reels 2L in the same manner as the stop switches 8C and 8R. Arranged in a positional relationship. That is, in the positional relationship between the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the stop switch 8L has a connection v between the corresponding reel 2L and a connection w between the stop switch 8C and the corresponding reel 2C, The stop switch 8R and the corresponding reel 2R are arranged in a positional relationship that does not intersect the connection y.

  In this embodiment, of the three gaming reels that have started to rotate, the gaming reel that stops first is referred to as a first stop reel, and the stop is referred to as a first stop. Similarly, the game reel that stops second is called the second stop reel, the stop is called second stop, the game reel that stops third is called the third stop reel, and the stop Is called the third stop or the final stop.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front door 1b shows a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning, and the contents when an error occurs. An auxiliary game indicator 12 for displaying an error code or the like, 1 BETLED 14 for informing that the bet number is set to 1 by lighting, 2 BETLED 15 for informing that the bet number is set to 2, and 3 betting numbers being set A 3BET LED 16 for notifying that the game has been performed, an insertion request LED 17 for notifying that a medal can be inserted by lighting, and a start valid LED 18 for notifying that the game start operation by operating the start switch 7 is effective. , Wait (the number of times the game reel has been A waiting display LED 19 that informs the fact that it is in a waiting state) by lighting and a replaying LED 20 that informs that a replay game that will be described later by lighting is provided. Yes.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 8) for notifying that the setting operation of the betting number by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, and stop switches 8L, 8C, Inside the 8R, there are left, middle and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C and 22R (see FIG. 8) for informing that the stop operation of the gaming reel by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R is effective. Each is provided. In addition to the left stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R described above, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R include an effect stop LED 57L that prompts the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by lighting in a freeze state described later. , 57C, and 57R are provided.

  Further, below the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R on the front door 1b, a lower panel on which a title of the slot machine 1 and a payout table are printed is provided.

  Inside the front door 1b, as shown in FIG. 2, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state to be described later and a stop state to be described later by a predetermined key operation, and changing a set value to be described later Set value indicator 24 that displays the set value at that time during confirmation of the set value or during confirmation of the set value, in a stopped state (until the reset operation is performed) at a predetermined trigger (for example, when the end of AT described later is determined) A stop switch 36a for selecting the validity / invalidity of the stop function controlled to a state where the progress of the game is regulated), an automatic checkout process (for example, when it is determined that the end of the AT described later is finished) ( From the medal insertion unit 4, the automatic settlement switch 36 b for selecting the validity / invalidity of the automatic settlement function that controls the medal stored as credits to be settled (returned regardless of the player's operation). A flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching the flow path of the inserted medal to either a later-described hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 2) side or the medal payout exit 9 side provided in the housing 1a. , A medal selector 29 having an insertion medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal inserted from the medal insertion portion 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank 34a, and a door opening detection switch 25 (see FIG. 8) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b. Is provided.

  Inside the housing 1a, as shown in FIG. 2, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, 2T, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, 32T (see FIG. 8), reels 2L, 2C, 2R, 2T described above are provided. From the reel unit 2 including reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R, and 33T (see FIG. 8) that can detect the reference positions, from the external output board 1000 (see FIG. 8) for outputting an external output signal, and from the medal insertion unit 4, respectively. A hopper tank 34a for storing inserted medals, a hopper motor 34b (see FIG. 8) for paying out medals stored in the hopper tank 34a from the medal payout opening 9, and medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b. A hopper unit 34 including a payout sensor 34c to be detected (see FIG. 8) and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, there is provided a full sensor 35a (see FIG. 8) made up of a pair of conductive members spaced left and right provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medal. When the member is electrically connected by contacting through the medal stored in the overflow tank 35, the amount of medal stored inside becomes equal to or more than a predetermined amount, that is, the overflow tank 35 becomes full. Can be detected.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a function key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state is provided on the front surface of the power supply box 100, and functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state in normal times. In the setting change state, a reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value of a winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery described later, and a power source that is operated when turning on / off the power source A switch 39 is provided.

  The power supply box 100 is provided inside the housing 1a, and the front door 1b can be opened by a predetermined key operation held by a store clerk or the like. The set key switch 37, the reset / setting switch 38, and the power switch 39 are operated only by a person such as a store clerk who has the key, and cannot be operated by the player. The same applies to the reset switch 23 detected by a predetermined key operation. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires further key operation after the front door 1b is opened by key operation, only the store clerk possessing the key for operating the setting key switch 37 among the game store clerk. Operation is possible.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. To use the credit, the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay line LN (see FIG. 4A) becomes valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In the present embodiment, the normal gaming state described later, the prescribed number of bets in the inside is set to three, and the prescribed number of bets in the CB described later is set to two, and according to these gaming states When the prescribed number of bets is set, the pay line LN becomes valid. In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line for determining whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3T, 3C, and 3R of the reels 2T, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4A, only the winning line LN straddling the symbols arranged in the middle stage of the reel 2T, the reel 2C, and the middle part of the reel 2R, which are visible from the perspective windows 3T, 3C, 3R, wins. It is said to be a line.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4A, the reel 2T stops at a position shifted by 0.5 symbols from the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the see-through window 3T includes the see-through window 3L, 3C and 3R are provided at a position shifted by 0.5 symbols below the symbols that stop at the middle stage, and at positions shifted by 0.5 symbols above the symbols that stop at the lower stages of the perspective windows 3L, 3C, and 3R. The winning line LN is set so as to pass the symbol that stops on the reels 2C and 2R, the symbol of the reel 2T that is shifted by 0.5 symbols, and the symbol of the middle stage of the reels 2L and 2C. .

  In this embodiment, only one winning line is applied, but a plurality of winning lines may be applied.

  In this embodiment, invalid lines LM1 to LM1 are provided separately from the winning line LN in order to make it easy to recognize that the winning line LN has a combination of symbols constituting the winning line. The invalid lines LM1 to LM5 are not determined based on the combination of symbols aligned with the invalid lines LM1 to LM5. When the combination of symbols constituting a specific prize is arranged on the winning line LN, When a combination of symbols (for example, bell-bell-bell) is selected when winning line LN is aligned with any one of LM1 to LM5, a symbol constituting a specific winning line on winning line LN is obtained. It is easy to recognize that the combination is complete.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4B, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the upper stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the invalid line LM1 straddling the symbols arranged horizontally in the upper stage, the middle stage of the reel 2L, In the middle line of the reel 2C, the middle line of the reel 2R, that is, the invalid line LM2 that straddles the horizontal pattern in the middle stage, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the lower stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the lower side of the picture Invalid line LM3 straddling invalid line LM4, upper stage of reel 2L, middle stage of reel 2C, lower stage of reel 2R, that is, invalid line LM4 straddling symbols arranged in the lower right, lower stage of reel 2L, middle stage of reel 2C, upper stage of reel 2R, ie, right Five types of invalid lines LM5 straddling the symbols arranged in the upward direction are defined as invalid lines LM.

  The reels 2T, 2C, and 2R are game reels used for games, whereas the reel 2L is an effect reel that is not used for games but used for performances. The reels 2T, 2C, and 2R If the combination of symbols derived to the winning line LN is a combination of symbols constituting a winning combination, the winning combination is determined regardless of the combination of symbols derived to the invalid lines LM1 to LM5 of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. On the other hand, if the combination of symbols derived to the winning lines LN of the reels 2T, 2C, and 2R is not a combination of symbols constituting a winning combination, the symbols derived to the invalid lines LM1 to LM5 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R No matter what the combination of the symbols is, it will not be determined as a prize.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2T, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2T, 2C, and 2R continuously change. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2T, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed in the fluoroscopic windows 3T, 3C, 3R.

  Then, when all the reels 2T, 2C, and 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) is displayed on the reels 2T, 2C, and 2R on the winning line LN. If the game stops as a result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped on the winning line LN as a display result of the reels 2T, 2C, and 2R, the gaming state is shifted according to the combination of symbols.

  In this embodiment, a configuration using three gaming reels is illustrated, but a configuration using only one gaming reel, a configuration using two gaming reels, and four or more gaming reels. A configuration using reels may be used, and in a configuration using two or more gaming reels, a winning is determined based on a combination of display results derived for all two or more gaming reels. It ’s fine. Further, in this embodiment, the variable display device is configured by a physical gaming reel, but the variable display device may be configured by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2T, 2C, and 2R rotate and the symbols start to change, any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated. When this occurs, the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R stops and the symbol is stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R until the rotation of the corresponding reels 2T, 2C, 2R is stopped is 190 ms (milliseconds).

  The reels 2T, 2C, and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 × 21 (the number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the maximum of 4 symbols is drawn in 190 ms. Will be able to. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated, the stop reference position of the gaming reel corresponding to the stop switch (the position corresponding to the see-through window 3T in the reel 2T, the reels 2C, 2R) If the symbol displayed at the lower position is used as a reference, symbols from the symbol to four frames ahead can be displayed at the stop reference position. Therefore, in each of the reels 2T, 2C, 2R, the stop switch 8L, When any one of 8R is operated, the symbols arranged within 5 frames including the symbols displayed on the winning line LN of the gaming reel corresponding to the stop switch are displayed on the winning line LN. Can be made.

  Hereinafter, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and 2T may be simply referred to as reels unless it is necessary to distinguish between them. Further, the reel 2L may be referred to as a left reel, the reel 2C as a middle reel, the reel 2R as a right reel, and the reel 2T as a specific reel. In addition, an operation for stopping the reels 2T, 2C, and 2R by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R may be referred to as a stop operation.

  FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 8, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game is controlled by the game control board 40, and the effect control board 90 responds to the game. The production effect is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies the drive power to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the. The power supply line for supplying power to the effect control board is directly connected from the power supply board 101 to the effect control board 90 without going through the game control board 40, and the power supply board 101 directly supplies power to the effect control board 90. May be supplied.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101.

  On the game control board 40, the above-described MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, insertion medal sensor 31, door open The detection switch 25 and reel sensors 33C, 33R, and 33T are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Detection signals from these connected switches are input.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit indicator 11, the game auxiliary indicator 12, 1-3 BET LEDs 14-16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, the BET switch valid LED 21, the left The middle and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, the reel motors 32C, 32R and 32T are connected, and the hopper motor 34b described above is connected via the power supply board 101. These electrical components are connected, and are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a main control unit 41, a control clock generation circuit 42, a random number clock generation circuit 43, a switch detection circuit 44, a motor drive circuit 45, a solenoid drive circuit 46, an LED drive circuit 47, and a power interruption detection circuit. 48 and a reset circuit 49 are mounted.

  The main control unit 41 performs processing related to the progress of the game, and directly or indirectly controls each unit of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40.

  The control clock generation circuit 42 generates a control clock CCLK serving as an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency outside the main control unit 41. The control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 42 is supplied to the clock circuit 502 shown in FIG. The random number clock generation circuit 43 generates a random number clock RCLK that is an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency different from the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK, outside the main control unit 41. The random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 43 is supplied to the random number circuits 508a and 508b shown in FIG.

  The switch detection circuit 44 takes in detection signals input from switches connected directly to the game control board 40 or via the power supply board 101 and transmits them to the main control unit 41. The motor drive circuit 45 transmits the motor drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to the reel motors 32C, 32R, and 32T. The solenoid drive circuit 46 transmits the solenoid drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to the flow path switching solenoid 30. The LED drive circuit 47 transmits the LED drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40. The power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 and outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41 when a voltage drop is detected. The reset circuit 49 provides a system reset signal to the main control unit 41 in a state where the power is unstable, such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off.

  FIG. 9 shows a configuration example of the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40. The main control unit 41 shown in FIG. 9 is a one-chip microcomputer, and includes an external bus interface 501, a clock circuit 502, a verification block 503, a specific information storage circuit 504, an arithmetic circuit 505, and a reset / interrupt. A controller 506, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 41a, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 41b, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 41c, a free-run counter circuit 507, random number circuits 508a and 508b, a timer circuit 509, The interrupt controller 510 includes a parallel input port 511, a serial communication circuit 512, a parallel output port 513, and an address decoding circuit 514.

  The external bus interface 501 is a bus interface having an interface function between an external bus and an internal bus of a chip constituting the main control unit 41, an address bus, a data bus, and a direction control function of each control signal.

  The clock circuit 502 is a circuit that generates the internal system clock SCLK by, for example, dividing the control clock CCLK by two.

  The verification block 503 is connected to an external verification machine and has a function of performing chip verification. The unique information storage circuit 504 is a circuit that stores a plurality of types of unique information that is internal information of the main control unit 41, and the arithmetic circuit 505 is a circuit that performs multiplication and division.

  The reset / interrupt controller 506 is for controlling various resets and interrupt requests generated inside or outside the main control unit 41.

  The reset / interrupt controller 506 includes an out-of-designated area prohibition (IAT) circuit 506a and a watchdog timer (WDT) 506b. The IAT circuit 506a is a circuit that monitors whether the user program is correctly executed in the designated area, and has a function of outputting an IAT generation signal when it is detected that the user program is executed outside the designated area. The watchdog timer 506b has a function of generating a timeout signal for each set period.

  The CPU 41a is a control CPU that executes game control in the slot machine 1 by executing a user program (game control processing program for game control) based on the control code read from the ROM 41b. When such game control is executed, the CPU 41a reads fixed data from the ROM 41b, the variable data writing operation in which the CPU 41a writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 41c and temporarily stores them, and the CPU 41a is temporarily stored in the RAM 41c. A variable data reading operation for reading out various variable data being received, a receiving operation in which the CPU 41a receives input of various signals from the outside of the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501, the parallel input port 511, the serial communication circuit 512, and the like. However, a transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the main control unit 41 through the external bus interface 501, the serial communication circuit 512, the parallel output port 513, and the like is also performed.

  The ROM 41b stores a control code indicating a user program (game control processing program for game control), fixed data, and the like.

  The RAM 41c provides a work area for game control. Here, at least a part of the RAM 41c may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power source. That is, even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, at least a part of the contents of the RAM 41c is stored for a predetermined period.

  As the free-run counter circuit 507, four channels of 8-bit free-run counters are mounted.

  The random number circuits 508a and 508b are circuits that generate numerical data that is a random value having a predetermined update range, such as an 8-bit random number or a 16-bit random number. In this embodiment, the hardware random number generated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b among the random number circuits 508a and 508b is used as a random number for internal lottery described later.

  The timer circuit 509 is an 8-bit programmable timer, and the main control unit 41 includes three channels of 8-bit counters as the timer circuit 509. In this embodiment, it is possible to perform a real-time interrupt request and time measurement by using a timer circuit 509 and setting by a user program.

  The interrupt controller 510 is a circuit that controls an external interrupt request from the PI5 / XINT terminal and an interrupt request from a built-in peripheral circuit (for example, serial communication circuit 512, random number circuits 508a and 508b, timer circuit 509). is there.

  The parallel input port 511 incorporates an 8-bit wide input-only port (PIP). Further, the parallel output port 513 provided in the main control unit 41 shown in FIG. 9 incorporates an output-only port (POP) having an 11-bit width.

  The serial communication circuit 512 is a circuit that performs asynchronous serial communication in input / output with respect to the outside. The main control unit 41 includes, as the serial communication circuit 512, a 1-channel circuit for both transmission and reception and a 3-channel circuit for transmission only.

  The address decoding circuit 514 is a circuit for decoding each functional block in the main control unit 41 and a chip select signal that is a decoding signal for an external device. In response to the chip select signal, the internal circuit of the main control unit 41 or the external device serving as a peripheral device is selectively operated effectively and can be accessed from the CPU 41a.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 transmits various commands to the sub control unit 91 via the parallel output port 513. A command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the sub control unit 91 toward the main control unit 41. In this embodiment, the command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 via the parallel output port 513, that is, the command is transmitted as a parallel signal, but via the serial communication circuit 512. A configuration in which a command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, that is, a configuration in which the command is transmitted as a serial signal may be employed.

  The main control unit 41 also receives detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 from the parallel input port 511. The main control unit 41 executes basic processing that shifts in stages according to the detection states of various switches input from the parallel input port 511.

  Further, the main control unit 41 can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In this embodiment, a timer interrupt process (main), which will be described later, is executed every time a time-out occurs in the timer circuit 509, that is, every fixed time interval (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment).

  The main control unit 41 is set to prohibit other interrupts during the execution of the interrupt process, and when a plurality of interrupts occur at the same time, the main control unit 41 prioritizes according to a predetermined order. An interrupt to be executed is set. If another interrupt factor occurs during the execution of the interrupt process and the interrupt factor continues even after the interrupt process is completed, a new interrupt will occur at that point. It will be.

  The main control unit 41 repeatedly loops the process according to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 changes as a basic process, and changes the detection state of the various switches. Execute a process that moves in stages. Further, the main control unit 41 executes a timer interrupt process (main) at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment). In addition, the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time required to complete the repeated process according to the control state in the basic process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main) Therefore, the process that is repeated according to the control state between the current and next timer interrupt processes (main) is completed at least once.

  A reel sensor 33L is connected to the effect control board 90, and a detection signal of the reel sensor 33L is inputted.

  The effect control board 90 includes a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) disposed on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1, an effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, the reel LEDs 55L, 55C, 55R and 55T described above, and a black light. Presentation devices such as LED 56, stop LEDs 57L, 57C, 57R, and reel motor 32L are connected, and these presentation devices are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the presentation control board 90. It has become so.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 allows the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, the aforementioned reel LEDs 55L, 55C, 55R and 55T, the black light LED 56, The output control of the production devices such as the production stop LEDs 57L, 57C, 57R, and the reel motor 32L is performed. However, the output control unit that directly performs the output control of the production device is produced separately from the sub-control unit 91. It is mounted on the substrate 90 or another substrate, the sub control unit 91 determines the output pattern of the effect device based on the command from the main control unit 41, and the output control unit is based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 91. It is good also as a structure which performs output control of a production | presentation apparatus, In such a structure, production is produced by both the sub-control part 91 and an output control part. So that the output control of the location is carried out.

  In this embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51, the production effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LEDs 55L, 55C, 55R, and 55T, the black light LED 56, the production stop LEDs 57L, 57C, and 57R, and the reel motor as production devices. 32L is illustrated, but the effect device is not limited to these, and for example, a display device that is mechanically driven, a mechanically driven item, and the like may be applied as the effect device.

  The effect control board 90 is composed of a microcomputer having a sub CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and I / O port 91d, and a liquid crystal display connected to the effect control board 90, a sub control unit 91 for effect control. 51, a display control circuit 92 that performs display control, an effect effect LED 52, reel LEDs 55L, 55C, 55R, and 55T, a black light LED 56, an LED drive circuit 93 that performs drive control of the effect stop LEDs 57L, 57C, and 57R, and speakers 53 and 54 A sound output circuit 94 for controlling sound output from the CPU, a reset circuit 95 for giving a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, and a reel connected to the effect control board 90 Detects detection signal input from sensor 33L A switch detection circuit 96, a clock device 97 for outputting time information including date information and time information, a power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 is monitored, and a voltage drop signal indicating that when a voltage drop is detected Is mounted on the sub CPU 91a, a motor drive circuit 99 for transmitting the motor drive signal output from the sub control unit 91 to the reel motor 32R, and other circuits. In response to a command transmitted from the game control board 40, it performs various controls for producing an effect, and directly or indirectly controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90.

  The reset circuit 95 has a lower voltage for releasing the reset signal than the reset circuit 49 that gives the system reset signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40. When the power is turned on, the sub control unit 91 It starts at an earlier stage than the unit 41. On the other hand, the power interruption detection circuit 98 has a voltage that outputs a voltage drop signal lower than the power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40. The sub control unit 91 detects a power failure at a later stage than the main control unit 41, and performs a power interruption process (sub) described later.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 has an interrupt function, generates an interrupt when receiving a command from the main control unit 41, and acquires a command transmitted from the main control unit 41. Execute command reception interrupt processing to be stored in the buffer. Further, the sub control unit 91 executes an interrupt process (sub), which will be described later, by generating an interrupt every time the input number of system clocks reaches a certain number, that is, every certain time interval (about 2 ms).

  Also, unlike the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 interrupts the process even when the timer interrupt process (sub) is being executed when an interrupt is generated based on the reception of the command. The command reception interrupt process is executed at the same time, and the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority even if interrupts that trigger the timer interrupt process (sub) occur at the same time.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in internal lottery, freeze lottery, navigation stock lottery, and the like, which will be described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rate being lower as the value is decreased in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  In this embodiment, regardless of which set value is set, the winning probability of the internal lottery among the lotteries performed by the main control unit 41 is common, and will be described later by the main control unit 41 according to the set value. The freezing lottery, the medal payout rate is changed by using different winning probabilities as winning probabilities of the later-described navigation stock lottery performed by the sub-control unit 91, but the main control unit 41 and the sub-control unit 91 perform a plurality of Any medal payout rate may be changed by changing the winning probability related to at least one lottery in accordance with the set value.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed as a display value on the setting value display 24, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Transition to the setting change state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the set value display 24 is updated one by one (when the set value 6 is further operated, the set value 1 is set. Return). When the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is determined as the set value. When the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the determined display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In order to check the set value, after the game is over, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on in a state where the bet amount is not set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value read out from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24, thereby shifting to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be progressed, and by setting the setting key switch 37 to the off state, the setting confirmation state is ended and the state in which the game can proceed is returned.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is detected every time the timer interruption process (main) is executed. When the determination process is performed and it is determined that the voltage drop signal is detected in the power failure determination process, a power interruption process (main) for setting data for determining whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the next return is performed. Run.

  Then, the main control unit 41 returns the processing state of the main control unit 41 to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c on the condition that the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of activation. However, if the RAM 41c data is not normal, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error state, thereby disabling the progress of the game.

  Further, the sub control unit 91 also determines whether or not the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 98 is detected in the timer interruption process (sub), and when it is determined that the voltage drop signal is detected, A power interruption process (sub) for setting data for determining whether or not the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the next return is executed.

  Then, the sub-control unit 91 returns the processing state of the sub-control unit 91 to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 91c on the condition that the data of the RAM 91c is normal at the time of activation. However, if the data in the RAM 91c is not normal, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM 91c is initialized. In this case, unlike the main control unit 41, only the RAM 91c is initialized, and the performance is not disabled.

  In addition, even when it is determined that the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of activation, the sub control unit 91 activates when receiving a setting command (described later) indicating that the setting change state has been entered from the main control unit 41. Even when a later-described return command or setting command indicating that the control state of the main control unit 41 has returned is not received even after a certain period of time has elapsed, the RAM 91c is initialized. In this case, the execution of the performance is not disabled only by initializing the RAM 91c.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a special work, a non-saved work, a general work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 sets the setting key switch 37 on and the reset / setting switch 38 when the RAM abnormality error occurs, when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both on. When starting in the off state, at the end of the CB, when the setting key switch 37 is in the off state and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed, five initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied. At this time, five types of initializations in different regions to be initialized are performed according to each initialization condition.

  Initialization 0 is initialization that is performed at the time of startup when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are on when a RAM error occurs. In initialization 0, all areas of the RAM 41c are initialized. The Initialization 1 is an initialization performed before the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the reset / setting switch 38 is turned off at the time of start-up, and is shifted to the setting change state. Of the storage area, areas other than the important work and the special work are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the CB. In initialization 2, the general work, the unused area, and the unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when the setting key switch 37 is off at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. In the initialization 3, the unsaved work, the unused area, and the The used stack area is initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, initialization 1 is performed before the change of the setting change state. However, the initialization 1 is performed at the end of the setting change state, or both before the change of the setting change state and at the end of the setting change state. Anyway.

  The special work includes a game state storage work in which a game state flag indicating a game state is stored and an internal winning flag storage work in which an internal winning flag is stored. Since the special work is not initialized, even when the setting is changed, the game state before the setting change and the internal winning flag (especially, the winning flag for the special role being carried over) are maintained. On the other hand, when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are turned on, all areas of the RAM 41c including the special work are initialized by initialization 0. In this case, the gaming state The internal winning flag is also initialized. In the following, an operation that starts when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are on is also referred to as a RAM clear operation.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a specified number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state (usually inside, CB) (in this embodiment, 3 in the normal gaming state and inside, 2 in CB). It is possible to start the game on condition that a specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set. In the present embodiment, the winning line LN is activated when a specified number of bets according to the gaming state are set.

  In this embodiment, when all the game reels are stopped, the activated pay line is activated (in the case of this embodiment, all the pay lines are always activated. A winning combination is obtained when a combination of symbols called “comb” is arranged on the winning line. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols.

  The type of winning combination in a general slot machine is determined according to the gaming state, but it can be broadly divided into a small role with medal payout and the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a re-playing role that can start the game and a special role that accompanies the transition of the gaming state. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c.

  Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until the combination of combinations permitted by the flag is complete, and is invalid in a game having the combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the winning flag for a special role is won, even if the combination of characters allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  In a game in which the game state is CB, the internal lottery is not performed, and the winning flags of all the small roles are set to be valid in each game. Will be allowed. The internal lottery is also performed in the game during the CB. However, regardless of the result of the internal lottery, the winning flags of all the small roles may be set so that the winning of any small role is allowed.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, whether or not the main control unit 41 allows the above winning combinations to be won before the display results of all the game reels are derived (specifically, when the start switch 7 is detected). It will be decided. In the internal lottery, first, a random value for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired when the start switch 7 is detected. Specifically, the value generated by the random number circuit 508b and stored in the random number value register of the random number circuit 508b is set as the lottery work assigned to the RAM 41c. For each combination determined according to the gaming state (normal gaming state, inside), the numerical data stored in the lottery work, the current gaming state, the bet number and the set value It is determined whether or not a winning is permitted according to the number of determination values for the combination.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined in accordance with the internal lottery target, the current gaming state, and the set value are sequentially assigned to the random number for internal lottery (numerical data stored in the lottery work). When the result of addition overflows, it is determined that the winning combination is won. For this reason, a winning combination will be won with a probability (number of determination values / 65536) according to the number of determination values.

  If a winning combination of any combination is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the combination determined to be winning is set in the internal winning flag storing work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the winning flag for the special role is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special combination is won, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. When a general combination is won, a winning flag for the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination is selected, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

  In the internal lottery of the present embodiment, the number of determination values of the lottery object combination is sequentially added to the internal lottery random value, and when the addition result overflows, it is determined that the combination is won. However, the number of determination values of the lottery target combination may be sequentially subtracted from the internal lottery random value, and when the result of the subtraction overflows, it may be determined that the combination is won.

  Further, in this embodiment, the number of determination values, which is the number of determination values determined to be winning, is determined for each lottery target role, and the number of determination values is sequentially added (subtracted) to the random number value for each lottery target role. In the case of overflow, the winning combination corresponding to the number of determination values is determined. However, for each lottery target role, a range of random values determined to be winning is determined, and the range to which the random value belongs It is good also as a structure which determines the winning of the role to perform.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2T, 2C, and 2R, that is, the gaming reels will be described.

  The main control unit 41 creates a table index and a table stored in the ROM 41b when the game reel starts to rotate and when the game reel is stopped and there is still a game reel that is still rotating. The stop control table is created for each spinning game reel with reference to the game data. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the spinning game reel is detected effectively, the stop that has been referred to is referred to by referring to the stop control table for the corresponding game reel. Based on the number of sliding symbols on the control table, control is performed to stop the rotation of the gaming reels corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, index data indicating the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) Differences up to the address where is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Even when the winning combinations are different, when the same control is applied, the same address is stored as the index data. In such a case, the same table creation data is referred to. Thus, a stop control table is created.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table that indicates the number of sliding symbols according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the stop status of the game reel.

  The stop control table that is referred to according to the gaming reel stop status is that all gaming reels are rotating, only a specific reel is stopped, only a middle reel is stopped, or only a right reel is stopped. Depending on whether the specific reel or middle reel is stopped, the specific reel or right reel is stopped, the middle reel or right reel is stopped, and any of the gaming reels In the stopped situation, it may differ depending on the stop position of the stopped gaming reel, so for each situation, the address of the stop control table to be referenced is registered for each spinning gaming reel. Based on the top address of the table creation data, the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to each situation can be specified From this particular address, and to be able to identify the stop control table required for each situation. When the same stop control table is applied, the same address is registered as the stop control table address even when the stop status of the game reels and the stop position of the stopped game reels are different. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed. In the present embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 336 steps (0 to 335) are used for the reel motors 32T, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32T, 32C, and 32R are driven in 336 steps, the reels 2T, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 16 steps (the number of steps that one symbol moves) are defined for one reel, and these areas are areas 0 to 20 from the reel reference position. A number is assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 0 to 20 from the reel reference position are assigned to the symbols of each gaming reel, so the symbols from 0 to 20 are assigned. On the other hand, area numbers 0 to 20 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of sliding symbols for each area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of sliding symbols for each area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3). Sliding frame when an operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected at a timing (a timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number). It is a table with each number set.

  Next, a procedure for creating a stop control table will be described. First, at the start of rotation of a gaming reel, the top address of table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all games are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each gaming reel corresponding to the state in which the reel for rotation is obtained is acquired, and the stop control table for each gaming reel stored at the acquired address is expanded for all the gaming reels. Create a stop control table.

  Further, when any one gaming reel is stopped, or when any two gaming reels are stopped, the index data acquired at the start of rotation of the gaming reel, that is, a table corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the start address of the creation data, and the game reel that has been stopped from the identified table creation data and the non-stop game reel corresponding to the area number of the stop position of the game reel The address of the stop control table is acquired, the stop control table of each gaming reel stored at the acquired address is expanded, and a stop control table is created for the unstopped gaming reel.

  Next, when the main control unit 41 effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating game reel, the main control unit 41 causes the corresponding game reel to derive a display result. When the operation corresponding to the rotating game reel is detected effectively among the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. Then, the area number of the stop operation position is specified, the stop control table of the gaming reel where the stop operation is detected is referred, and the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the specified area number of the stop operation position is acquired. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the gaming reel by the number of acquired sliding frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of sliding frames to the stop is calculated, and the gaming reel is rotated by the calculated number of steps. Control to stop. As a result, the region corresponding to the region number that is the stop position ahead of the number of sliding frames from the region corresponding to the region number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the reels 2C, 2R). Is stopped in the lower region of the see-through windows 3C, 3R, and the reel 2T is stopped in the see-through window 3T region).

  In the table index of the present embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and further, one table creation data contains one gaming item. Only one address is stored as an address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status of the reel (and the stop position of the stopped game reel). That is, the table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and the stop control table corresponding to the stop state of the gaming reel (and the stopped position of the stopped gaming reel) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created by referring to them is also unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the stopping status of the gaming reel (and the stopping position of the stopped gaming reel). It becomes. Therefore, the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern, when the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the gaming reel stop status (and the stopped position of the stopped gaming reel) all have the same conditions. Based on this, stop control of the gaming reel is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of sliding symbols, and it is possible to stop a gaming reel by drawing a maximum of four symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop a gaming reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting a stop operation. The stop position of the symbol can be designated from the range of a maximum of 5 symbols including the stopped operation position.

  In this embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames on the winning line, and the non-winning winning combination is drawn so that it is not aligned on the winning line. Create a stop control table with the number of frames defined and control the stop of the gaming reels. If you do not win any of the roles, stop with a number of sliding symbols that do not match any of the roles Create a control table and control the stop of the gaming reels. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. The combination that is not performed is stopped without being aligned in the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when a special role and a small role are elected at the same time, such as when a special role is elected in a state where the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, the winning small role is selected as a winning line. The number of sliding frames is determined so that the maximum number of frames can be drawn in the range of 4 frames, and for the stop operation position where the selected small role cannot be pulled in the range of up to 4 frames to the winning line, the special role won A stop control table in which the number of sliding frames is determined so as to draw the maximum to the winning line within a range of 4 frames is created, and stop control of the gaming reels is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if it is possible to stop all the small roles that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line and stop them, control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If you can't draw a small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, if you can stop with a special role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, Control is performed to align and stop this, and the winning combination that has not been won is controlled to be stopped without being aligned in the 4-frame pull-in range. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the small combination on the winning line over the special combination, and the special combination can be won only when the small combination cannot be drawn. In the case where a special combination and a small combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the small combination is drawn, and the small combination is not aligned on the winning line at the same time as the special combination.

  Also, when a special role and a small role are elected at the same time, priority is given to the control of aligning the special role on the winning line over the small role, and only when the special role cannot be drawn, the small role is placed on the winning line. You may perform control to align.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the special role and the replaying role are won at the same time, such as when the replaying role is won while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, the stop operation is performed. In this case, the control is performed so that the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to 4 frames. In this case, the symbols constituting the re-gamer or the symbols constituting the re-gamer to be simultaneously elected are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less, that is, within 4 frames, for any of the reels 2T, 2C, and 2R. Since it can always be stopped at any position within the 4-frame pull-in range, if the special combination and the re-playing combination are elected at the same time, the timing of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player Without fail, the re-playing role will always be won. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win. In the case where the special combination and the re-playing combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the re-playing combination is drawn in and the special combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the re-playing combination.

  In this embodiment, the game reel is controlled to be stopped using a stop control table that can specify the number of sliding symbols for each timing at which the stop operation is performed. However, the stop position can be specified. A configuration in which a stop position is specified from the stop position table and stop control is performed to stop the gaming reel at the specified stop position, and a stop that can be stopped at the timing when the stop operation is performed without using the stop control table or the stop position table. Configuration to search and identify the position, stop control to stop the gaming reel at the specified stop position, stop control using the stop control table, stop control using the stop position table, stop control table and stop position table Configuration that uses stop control by searching and specifying stop positions that can be stopped without using them, and stopping by partially changing the stop control table and stop position table It may be configured to perform the control.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 continues to rotate the gaming reels for which the stop operation has not yet been detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the gaming reel starts to rotate. On the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding gaming reel. Even if the rotation of the gaming reel is temporarily stopped due to the occurrence of the reel rotation error, the game reel is stopped until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected after the rotation of the gaming reel is restarted thereafter. A game reel whose operation has not been detected is continuously rotated, and control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding game reel on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected. It has become.

  In the present embodiment, the control for stopping the display result on the corresponding gaming reel is performed on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected. When a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed since the start of rotation, even if the game reel is not stopped, it is assumed that the stop operation has been performed and each game reel is automatically stopped. Automatic stop control may be performed. In this case, since the gaming reels are stopped without the player's operation, for example, even if any winning combination is won, a display result that does not constitute any winning combination can be derived. preferable.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 counts the game time, which is the time elapsed from the start of the rotation of the game reel, that is, every time the game reel starts to rotate after the game starts. When a game start operation is performed in a state where a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals and the game start operation is enabled after the end of one game, the previous game If the game time that has started counting from the start of rotation of the game reel is equal to or longer than a predetermined regulation time (4.1 seconds in this embodiment), that is, a predetermined time from the start of rotation of the game reel of the previous game. If the regulation time has elapsed, rotation of the game reel in the game is started at that time.

  On the other hand, when a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals after the end of one game, and the game start operation is performed in a state where the game start operation is valid, the game reel of the previous game If the game time that started timing from the start of rotation of the game is less than the predetermined regulation time, that is, if the predetermined regulation time has not elapsed since the start of rotation of the game reel of the previous game, the game Without starting the rotation of the reel, the game waits from the start of the rotation of the game reel of the previous game until the game time reaches a predetermined regulation time, and when the predetermined regulation time is reached, Start spinning the gaming reel.

  That is, when the predetermined regulation time has not elapsed since the start of rotation of the gaming reel in the previous game, the main control unit 41 regulates the progress of the game until the predetermined regulation time has elapsed. The progress of the game is regulated so that the shortest time of the game is not less than a predetermined regulation time.

  Next, commands that the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 will be described.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 sends a sub-control unit 91 a BET command, a credit command, an internal winning command, a freeze lottery result command, a freeze start command, a first stage progress command, a first stage result command, and a preparation. Outage stop command, second stage progress command, second stage result command, freeze end command, reel rotation start command, reel stop valid command, reel stop command, winning number command, payout start command, payout end command, gaming state command A plurality of types of commands including a standby command, a stop command, an error command, a return command, a setting command, a setting confirmation command, a door command, and an operation detection command are transmitted.

  These commands consist of 1-byte type data indicating the command type and 1-byte extension data indicating the command content, and the sub-control unit 91 can determine the command type from the type data.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted (that is, the number of medals used for setting the number of bets) and whether or not a BET sound is output, from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game. In this state, when a prescribed number of bets is not set, a medal is inserted or when the bet number is set by operating the MAXBET switch 6, this message is transmitted. In addition, since the BET command is transmitted when the betting number setting operation is performed, the sub-control unit 91 receives the BET command, so that the betting number setting operation is performed, the betting number, and Whether or not a BET sound is output can be specified.

  The credit command is a command that can specify the number of medals stored as credits and the type of sound to be output (BET sound or credit sound). In the state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game Yes, this message is sent when a medal is inserted and credits are added in a state where a specified number of bets is set.

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the internal lottery result, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game. Further, since the internal winning command is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated, it is possible to specify that the start switch 7 has been operated by receiving the internal winning command.

  The freeze lottery result command is a command that can specify the result of the freeze lottery that determines whether or not to control to the freeze state, which will be described later, and the results of the first stage constituting the freeze state (misaligned, red 7 aligned, blue 7 aligned) And sent after the internal winning command.

  The freeze start command is a command that can specify that the game is controlled to the freeze state, and is transmitted after the freeze lottery result command.

  The first stage progress command specifies that the result of the first stage constituting the freeze state (reel inactive, red 7 aligned, blue 7 aligned) is to derive the result by proceeding with the first stage constituting the frozen state. This is a possible command and is transmitted when the stop switch 8L is operated after the start of the first stage constituting the freeze state or when 10 seconds elapses before the stop switch 8L is operated.

  The first stage result command is a command that can specify that the result of the first stage is derived, and is transmitted when the result of the first stage constituting the freeze state is derived.

  The second stage start command is a command that can specify that the second stage constituting the freeze state is started, and is transmitted when the second stage is started.

  The preparation-out stop command is a command that can specify that the preparation stage has stopped and the second stage constituting the freeze state can be advanced, and is prepared in the second stage constituting the freeze state. Sent when the outcome stops.

  The second stage progress command indicates that the second stage constituting the freeze state is advanced and the result is derived, and the result of the continuous lottery in the second stage constituting the freeze state (reel inactive, red 7 aligned, blue 7 aligned ) And is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated after the start of the second stage constituting the freeze state.

  The second stage result command is a command that can specify that the result of the second stage is derived, and is transmitted when the result of the second stage constituting the freeze state is derived.

  The freeze end command is a command that can specify that a series of freeze state control ends after the start of the freeze state, and is transmitted when the freeze state ends.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of the rotation of the gaming reel, and is transmitted when the rotation of the gaming reel is started.

  The reel stop valid command is a command for notifying that the game reel stop operation is valid. The game reel is rotated at a constant speed, and the game reel stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is valid. Sent when

  The reel stop command indicates whether the game reel to be stopped is a specific reel, a middle reel, or a right reel, the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding game reel, the area number of the stop position of the corresponding game reel Are transmitted each time stop control is performed in accordance with a stop operation of each gaming reel. Since the reel stop command is transmitted when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, it is possible to specify that the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated by receiving the reel stop command. .

  The winning number command is a command that can specify the combination of symbols arranged on the winning line LN, whether or not a winning is received, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the winning. Sent after is done.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The game state command is a command that can specify the current game state (normal game state, inside, CB), and is transmitted at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and after one game is over, a credit (which was used for setting the bet number) is set when the transition to the standby state is made after a predetermined time without setting the bet number. (Including medals) is sent out after the medal payout is completed and the payout end command is sent.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state. When the stop state is controlled after the CB is finished, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted, the reset operation is performed, and the stop command is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or cancellation of an error condition and the type of error condition. When an error is determined and controlled to an error condition, an error command indicating the occurrence and type of the error condition is sent and reset. When the error state is canceled after the operation is performed, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The return command is a command indicating that the main control unit 41 has returned to the control state before the power interruption, and is transmitted when the main control unit 41 returns to the control state before the power interruption.

  The setting command is a command indicating the start or end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change. At the time of transition to the setting change state, a setting command indicating the start of the setting change state is transmitted. A setting command indicating the end of the setting change state, the setting value after the setting change, and the gaming state after the setting change (normal gaming state, inside, CB) is transmitted. Further, since the control state of the main control unit 41 is initialized with the transition to the setting change state, it can be specified that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been initialized by the setting command indicating the start of setting. .

  The setting confirmation command is a command that indicates the start or end of the setting confirmation state. A setting confirmation command that indicates the start of setting confirmation is transmitted when entering the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation end is indicated when the setting confirmation state ends. A confirmation command is sent.

  The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, that is, on (open state) / off (closed state), when the power is turned on, at the end of one game (after the game is over, the bet number of the next game) Sent before the setting of ”can be started), and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes (from on to off, from off to on).

  The operation detection command is a command indicating the detection state (on / off) of the operation switches (MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R), and is transmitted periodically.

  Of these commands, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated in the basic process, temporarily stored in the command queue provided in the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main) described above. .

  On the other hand, the door command is generated in the door monitoring process of the timer interrupt process (main), temporarily stored in the command queue provided in the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main) thereafter. The

  The operation detection command is generated in the switch input determination process of the timer interrupt process (main), temporarily stored in the command queue provided in the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the subsequent command transmission process.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub-control unit 91 based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  When the sub control unit 91 receives a command from the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 executes a command reception interrupt process. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  The reception buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 16 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub-control unit 91 is the earliest. Based on the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b based on the command received in the stage, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53, 54, and the reel LEDs 55L, 55C based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table. , 55R, 55T, black light LED 56, stop LEDs for effect 57L, 57C, 57R, output control of various effect devices such as reel motor 32L.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the effect effect LED 52, the reel LEDs 55L, 55C, 55R, and 55T, the black light LED 56, and the speakers 53 and 54 for each of a plurality of types of effect patterns. Control patterns of these effect devices, such as the output mode and the operation mode of the reel motor 32L, are registered, and when the sub control unit 91 receives a command, the effect set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. Of the control patterns registered corresponding to the pattern, the control pattern corresponding to the received command type is referred to, and output control of the effect device is performed based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the sub-control unit 91 receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub-control unit 91 stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and changes to the newly received command. An effect based on the corresponding control pattern is executed. In other words, even if the production is not finished to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new command is received unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command is executed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b, and when the sub control unit 91 receives the internal winning command, the sub control unit 91 stores the effect pattern in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. With reference to the registered selection rate, one of the effect patterns is selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected effect pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game. Even if the same command is received, a different control pattern is selected depending on the effect pattern selected when the internal winning command is received. As a result, different effects may be performed depending on the effect pattern.

  10 to 14 are diagrams for explaining the types of combinations, symbol combinations, and technical matters related to combinations in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41, and FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an outline of the gaming state. The following description and the symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 10 to 14 are described as combinations in which symbols on the winning line LN are arranged in the order of a specific reel, a middle reel, and a right reel.

  First, with reference to FIG. 10, the special combination among the winning combinations will be described. Among the winning combinations, CB is included in the special combination.

  CB is awarded when the combination of “White 7-White 7-Blue 7” is aligned on the winning line LN in the specified reel, middle reel, and right reel in the normal gaming state or inside, and the gaming state shifts to CB. To do.

  CB is a state in which winnings of all small combinations are permitted, and any small combination will always win regardless of the timing of the stop operation. The CB ends when the total number of medals paid out in the CB exceeds 29.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the small combination among the winning combinations will be described. Among the winning roles, 1 bell 1A, 1 bell 1B, 1 bell 2, 1 bell 3, 1 bell 4A, 1 bell 4B, 1 bell 5, 1 bell 6, 1 A single bell 7A, a single bell 7B, a single bell 8, a single bell 9, a single 1, a single 2, a middle bell, a right-down bell, a lower bell, and a watermelon are included.

  In the following description, if it is not particularly necessary to distinguish, one bell 1A, one bell 1B, one bell 2, one bell 3, one bell 4A, one bell 4B, one bell 5, 1 The single bell 6, the single bell 7A, the single bell 7B, the single bell 8, and the single bell 9 are simply referred to as a single bell, and the single 1, 1 and 2 are simply referred to as one.

  The single bell 1A is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Cherry a-White 7” is arranged on the winning line LN in the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel in any gaming state. When one bell 1A wins, one medal is paid out. In addition, when one bell 1A wins in CB, two medals are paid out.

  “Replay” of a specific reel constituting one bell 1A is arranged within five frames, but “cherry a” of the middle reel constituting one bell 1A and “white 7” of the right reel are five frames. There are places that are not located within. For this reason, even if the 1-bell 1A is won in the internal lottery described later, if the middle reel and the right reel are not stopped at an appropriate timing, the winning 1-bell 1A will not be won. .

  The single bell 1B is awarded in any gaming state when a combination of “Replay-Cherry a-Cherry a” is aligned on the winning line LN on the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. When one bell 1B wins, one medal is paid out. Further, when one bell 1B wins in CB, two medals are paid out.

  “Replay” of a specific reel constituting one bell 1B is arranged within five frames, but “cherry a” of the middle reel constituting one bell 1B and “cherry a” of the right reel are five frames. There are places that are not located within. For this reason, even if the single bell 1B is won in the internal lottery described later, if the stop operation of the middle reel and the right reel is not performed at an appropriate timing, it is possible to win the winning single bell 1B. Absent.

  The single bell 2 wins when a combination of “Replay-Cherry a-BAR” is arranged on the winning line LN in the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel in any gaming state. When one bell 2 wins, one medal is paid out. Further, when one bell 2 wins in CB, two medals are paid out.

  The “replay” of the specific reel that constitutes one bell 2 is arranged within 5 frames, but the “cherry a” of the middle reel that constitutes one bell 2 and the “BAR” of the right reel are within 5 frames. There is a place that is not arranged. For this reason, even if one bell 2 is won in an internal lottery to be described later, if the stop operation of the middle reel and the right reel is not performed at an appropriate timing, it is possible to win the winning one bell 2 Absent.

  The single bell 3 wins when a combination of “Replay-Cherry a-Plum” is arranged on the winning line LN in the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel in any gaming state. When one bell 3 wins, one medal is paid out. In addition, when one bell 3 wins in CB, two medals are paid out.

  The “replay” of a specific reel constituting one bell 3 is arranged within 5 frames, but “cherry a” of the middle reel constituting “bell 3” and “plum” of the right reel are within 5 frames. There is a place that is not arranged. For this reason, even if one bell 3 is won in the internal lottery described later, if the stop operation of the middle reel and the right reel is not performed at an appropriate timing, it is possible to win the winning one bell 3 Absent.

  The single bell 4A wins when the combination of “Replay-Cherry b-White 7” is aligned on the winning line LN in the specific reel, middle reel, and right reel in any gaming state, and the normal gaming state or internal When one bell 4A wins, one medal is paid out. Further, when one bell 4A wins in CB, two medals are paid out.

  “Replay” of a specific reel constituting one bell 4A is arranged within five frames, but “cherry b” of the middle reel constituting one bell 4A and “white 7” of the right reel are five frames. There are places that are not located within. For this reason, even if one bell 4A is won in the internal lottery described later, if the stop operation of the middle reel and the right reel is not performed at an appropriate timing, it is possible to win the winning one bell 4A. Absent.

  The single bell 4B wins when the combination of “Replay-Cherry b-Cherry a” is aligned on the winning line LN on the specific reel, middle reel, and right reel in any gaming state, and the normal gaming state or internal When one bell 4B wins, one medal is paid out. In addition, when one bell 4B wins in CB, two medals are paid out.

  “Replay” of a specific reel constituting one bell 4B is arranged within five frames, but “cherry b” of the middle reel constituting one bell 4B and “cherry a” of the right reel are five frames. There are places that are not located within. For this reason, even if one bell 4B is won in an internal lottery to be described later, if the stop operation of the middle reel and the right reel is not performed at an appropriate timing, it is possible to win the winning one bell 4B. Absent.

  The single bell 5 is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Cherry b-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN on the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel in any gaming state. When one bell 5 wins, one medal is paid out. Further, when one bell 5 wins in CB, two medals are paid out.

  The “replay” of a specific reel that constitutes one bell 5 is arranged within 5 frames, but the “cherry b” of the middle reel that constitutes one bell 5 and the “BAR” of the right reel are within 5 frames. There is a place that is not arranged. For this reason, even if one bell 5 is won in an internal lottery to be described later, if the stop operation of the middle reel and the right reel is not performed at an appropriate timing, it is possible to win the winning one bell 5 Absent.

  The single bell 6 wins when a combination of “Replay-Cherry b-Plum” is arranged on the winning line LN in the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel in any gaming state. When one bell 6 wins, one medal is paid out. In addition, when one bell 6 wins in CB, two medals are paid out.

  The “replay” of the specific reel that constitutes one bell 6 is arranged within 5 frames, but the “cherry b” of the middle reel that constitutes one bell 6 and the “plum” of the right reel are within 5 frames. There is a place that is not arranged. For this reason, even if one bell 6 is won in an internal lottery to be described later, if the stop operation of the middle reel and the right reel is not performed at an appropriate timing, it is possible to win the winning one bell 6 Absent.

  The single bell 7A is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Plum-White 7” is arranged on the winning line LN in the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel in any gaming state. When one bell 7A wins, one medal is paid out. In addition, when one bell 7A wins in CB, two medals are paid out.

  The “replay” of the specific reels constituting the single bell 7A is arranged to be within 5 frames, but the “plum” of the middle reel and the “white 7” of the right reel constituting the single bell 7A are There are places that are not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if one bell 7A is won in the internal lottery described later, if the stop operation of the middle reel and the right reel is not performed at an appropriate timing, it is possible to win the winning one bell 7A. Absent.

  The single bell 7B wins when the combination of “Replay-Plum-Cherry a” is aligned on the winning line LN in the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel in any gaming state. When one bell 7B wins, one medal is paid out. Further, when one bell 7B wins in CB, two medals are paid out.

  The “replay” of the specific reel that constitutes one bell 7B is arranged within 5 frames, but the “plum” of the middle reel that constitutes 1 bell 7B and the “cherry a” of the right reel are within 5 frames. There is a place that is not arranged. For this reason, even if one bell 7B is won in the internal lottery described later, if the stop operation of the middle reel and the right reel is not performed at an appropriate timing, it is possible to win the winning one bell 7B. Absent.

  The single bell 8 wins when the combination of “Replay-Plum-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN on the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel in any gaming state. When one bell 8 wins, one medal is paid out. Further, when one bell 8 wins in CB, two medals are paid out.

  The “replay” of a specific reel constituting the single bell 8 is arranged within 5 frames, but the “plum” of the middle reel constituting the single bell 8 and the “BAR” of the right reel are within 5 frames. There are places that are not arranged. For this reason, even if one bell 8 is won in an internal lottery to be described later, if the stop operation of the middle reel and the right reel is not performed at an appropriate timing, it is possible to win the winning one bell 8 Absent.

  The single bell 9 wins when a combination of “replay-plum-plum” is arranged on the winning line LN in the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel in any gaming state. When one bell 9 wins, one medal is paid out. In addition, when one bell 9 wins in CB, two medals are paid out.

  The “replay” of the specific reels constituting the single bell 9 is arranged within 5 frames, but the “plum” of the middle reel constituting the single bell 9 and the “plum” of the right reel are within 5 frames. There are places that are not arranged. For this reason, even if one bell 9 is won in the internal lottery to be described later, if the stop operation of the middle reel and the right reel is not performed at an appropriate timing, it is possible to win the winning one bell 9 Absent.

  In any gaming state, each one 1 is “blue 7-bell-red 7”, “blue 7-bell-replay”, “watermelon-bell-red” on the winning line LN in the specific reel, middle reel, and right reel. 7 ”or“ Watermelon-Bell-Replay ”is awarded, and one medal is paid out when one is won in the normal gaming state or inside. In addition, when one piece is won in the CB, two medals are paid out.

  The design of any one of “Blue 7” or “Watermelon” on the specific reel that constitutes one sheet, “Bell” on the middle reel, “Red 7” on the right reel, or “Replay” is 5 Arranged within frames. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when one sheet is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that the prize can be awarded regardless of the timing of the stop operation.

  In any gaming state, one 2 is “blue 7-BAR-bell”, “blue 7-replay-bell”, “watermelon-BAR-bell” on the winning line LN in the specific reel, middle reel, and right reel. Or, when any combination of “watermelon-replay-bell” is prepared, a prize is awarded, and when one or two prizes are won normally or inside, one medal is paid out. In addition, when two medals are won in the CB, two medals are paid out.

  Within 5 frames, one of “Blue 7” or “Watermelon” on a specific reel that constitutes 2 sheets, “BAR” or “Replay” on a middle reel, or “Bell” on a right reel It is arranged to be. For this reason, in the internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that, in principle, when 1 sheet 2 is won, it can be said that the winning can be made regardless of the timing of the stop operation.

  The middle bell is awarded when a combination of “bell-bell-bell” is arranged on the winning line LN in the specific reel, middle reel, and right reel in any gaming state, and the middle bell is in the normal gaming state or inside. When is won, 8 medals are paid out. In addition, when the middle bell wins in CB, two medals are paid out.

  The “bell” of the specific reel, the “bell” of the middle reel, and the “bell” of the right reel constituting the middle bell are arranged within 5 frames in each. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when the middle bell is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that, as a rule, it can be awarded regardless of the timing of the stop operation.

  The right-down bell is awarded when a combination of “Replay-Bell-Red 7” or “Replay-Bell-Replay” is aligned on the winning line LN on the specified reel, middle reel, and right reel in any gaming state. When the lower right bell wins in the normal gaming state or inside, eight medals are paid out. In addition, when the right-downward is won in CB, two medals are paid out.

  Any one of the “replay” of the specific reel, the “bell” of the middle reel, the “red 7” of the right reel, and the “replay” constituting the downward-sloping bell is arranged within 5 frames in each. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when a right-down bell is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that a winning can be made regardless of the timing of the stop operation.

  The lower bell is “blue 7-white 7-red 7”, “blue 7-white 7-replay”, “blue 7-BAR” on the winning line LN on the specific reel, middle reel, and right reel in any gaming state. -"Red 7", "Blue 7-BAR-Replay", "Blue 7-Replay-Red 7", "Blue 7-Replay-Replay", or "Watermelon-White 7-Red 7", "Watermelon-White 7-" "Replay", "Watermelon-BAR-Red 7", "Watermelon-BAR-Replay", "Watermelon-Replay-Red 7", "Watermelon-Replay-Replay" will be awarded when any combination is complete. When the lower bell wins in the gaming state or inside, 8 medals are paid out. Further, when the lower bell wins in CB, two medals are paid out.

  “Blue 7” or “Watermelon” symbol of the specific reel constituting the lower bell, “White 7”, “BAR” or “Replay” symbol of the middle reel, “Red 7” of the right reel ] And “Replay” are arranged so as to be within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, as a general rule, when the lower bell is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it is possible to win a prize regardless of the timing of the stop operation.

  A watermelon is awarded when the combination of “Bell-Watermelon-Cherry b” is aligned on the winning line LN in the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel in any gaming state, and the watermelon is in the normal gaming state or inside. When winning, 5 medals are paid out. Also, when the watermelon wins in CB, two medals are paid out.

  The “bell” on the left reel that makes up the watermelon is arranged to be within 5 frames, but the “watermelon” on the middle reel and “cherry b” on the right reel are arranged within 5 frames. There are parts that are not. For this reason, even if a watermelon is won in an internal lottery to be described later, if the operation of stopping the middle reel and the right reel is not performed at an appropriate timing, the winning watermelon will not be won.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12 to FIG. 14, the re-game player among the winning combinations will be described. Among the winning roles, the replaying role includes middle replay, right-up replay, bell replay, single cherry, left failure replay, middle failure replay, red bottom row replay, blue right-up replay, strong cherry 1, strong cherry 2, weak Cherry 1 and weak cherry 2 are included.

  In the following description, there is a case where the strong cherry 1 and the strong cherry 2 are simply referred to as a strong cherry, and the weak cherry 1 and the weak cherry 2 are simply referred to as a weak cherry unless particularly distinguished. In addition, the red bottom aligned replay is simply referred to as the red 7 aligned replay, the blue right rising replay is referred to as the blue 7 aligned replay, and if there is no need to distinguish between the red 7 aligned replay and the blue 7 aligned replay, the 7 red aligned replay is simply 7 aligned. Sometimes called replay.

  The middle stage replay is awarded when a combination of “replay-replay-replay” is arranged on the winning line LN in the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel in the normal gaming state or inside, and a replay game (replay) is given. Is done.

  The “replay” of the specific reel, the “replay” of the middle reel, and the “replay” of the right reel constituting the normal replay 1 are arranged within 5 frames in each. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when the middle stage replay is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that the prize can be awarded regardless of the timing of the stop operation.

  A right-up replay is awarded when a combination of “Bell-Replay-Red 7” or “Bell-Replay-Bell” is aligned on the winning line LN in the specified reel, middle reel, and right reel in the normal gaming state or inside. Thus, a replay game (replay) is given.

  Any one of the symbols “bell” of the specific reel, “replay” of the middle reel, “red 7”, and “bell” of the right reel, which constitute the right-up replay, is arranged within 5 frames in each. For this reason, it can be said that, as a general rule, when a right-up replay is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be awarded regardless of the timing of the stop operation.

  The bell replay is “blue 7-bell-cherry a”, “blue 7-bell-white 7”, “blue 7-bell” on the winning line LN in the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel in the normal gaming state or inside. -BAR "," Blue 7-Bell-Plum "," Watermelon Bell-Cherry a "," Watermelon Bell-White 7 "," Watermelon Bell-BAR "," Watermelon Bell-Plum " And a replay game (replay) is awarded.

  One of the special reels of “Blue 7” and “Watermelon” that make up the Bell Replay, “Bell” in the middle reel, “Cherry a”, “White 7”, “BAR”, “Plum” in the right reel Any one of the symbols is arranged within 5 frames in each. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when a bell replay is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that a winning can be made regardless of the timing of the stop operation.

  The single cherry is “white 7-bell-cherry a”, “white 7-bell-cherry b”, “white 7-bell” on the winning line LN in the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel in the normal gaming state or inside. -"Plum", "Cherry a-Bell-Cherry a", "Cherry a-Bell-Cherry b", "Cherry a-Bell-Plum" will be awarded and a replay game (replay) will be given Is done.

  The right-reel “cherry a”, “cherry b”, and “plum” symbols that make up a single cherry, and the middle-reel “bell” are arranged to be within 5 frames. There are places where the symbols of “white 7” and “cherry a” of the specific reel constituting the are not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if a single cherry is won in an internal lottery to be described later, if the specific reel is not stopped at an appropriate timing, the winning single cherry will not be won.

  Left failure replay is a replay game (replay) when a combination of “Bell-Blue 7-Replay” is arranged on the winning line LN in the specified reel, middle reel, and right reel in the normal gaming state or inside. Is granted.

  The “bell” of the specific reel and “replay” of the right reel that make up the left fail replay are arranged within 5 frames, but “blue 7” of the middle reel is not arranged within 5 frames. There are places. For this reason, even if the left failure replay is won in the internal lottery described later, if the middle reel stop operation is not performed at an appropriate timing, the winning left replay will not be won.

  The middle failure replay is awarded when a combination of “cherry a-replay-replay” is arranged on the winning line LN in the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel in the normal gaming state or inside, and the replay game (replay) Is granted.

  The “replay” of the middle reel constituting the middle failure replay and the “replay” of the right reel are arranged so as to be within 5 frames, but the “cherry a” of the specific reel constituting the middle failure replay is 5 There are places that are not placed within the frame. For this reason, even if a mid-failure replay is won in an internal lottery to be described later, if the stop operation of the specific reel is not performed at an appropriate timing, the winning mid-fail replay will not be won.

  A red lower all-round replay is awarded when a combination of “Replay-Blue 7-Replay” is arranged on the winning line LN in the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel in the normal game state or inside, and the replay game (replay game) ) Is given.

  The “replay” of the specific reels that make up the lower red line replay and the “replay” of the right reel are arranged to be within 5 frames, but the “blue 7” of the middle reel that makes up the red lower line replay is There are places that are not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if the red lot lower replay is won in an internal lottery described later, if the middle reel stop operation is not performed at an appropriate timing, the winning red lower row replay will not be won.

  A blue-right-up replay is awarded when a combination of “Cherry a-Blue 7-Replay” is arranged on the winning line LN in the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel in the normal gaming state or inside, and the replay game (replay) Game).

  The “replay” of the right reel that makes up the blue-right rising replay is arranged to be within 5 frames, but the specific reel “cherry a” and the middle reel “blue 7” that make up the blue-right rising replay There are places that are not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if the right-and-left replay is won in the internal lottery described later, if the stop operation of the specific reel and the middle reel is not performed at an appropriate timing, the winning blue-right replay will be won. There is no.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the strong cherry 1 is “red 7-cherry a-red 7”, “red 7-cherry a” on the winning line LN in the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel in the normal gaming state or inside. -"Blue 7", "Red 7-Cherry a-White 7", "Red 7-Cherry a-BAR", "Red 7-Cherry a-Bell", "Red 7-Cherry b-Red 7", "Red 7" -Cherry b-Blue 7 "," Red 7-Cherry b-White 7 "," Red 7-Cherry b-BAR "," Red 7-Cherry b-Bell "," Red 7-Plum-Red 7 "," "Red 7-Plum-Blue 7", "Red 7-Plum-White 7", "Red 7-Plum-BAR", "Red 7-Plum-Bell", "Blue 7-Cherry a-Red 7", "Blue 7-Cherry a-Blue 7 ”,“ Blue 7-Cherry a-White 7 ”,“ Blue 7-Cherry a-BAR ”,“ Blue 7-Cherry a-Be ” ", Blue 7-Cherry b-Red 7", "Blue 7-Cherry b-Blue 7", "Blue 7-Cherry b-White 7", "Blue 7-Cherry b-BAR", "Blue 7-Cherry" “b-bell”, “blue 7-plum-red 7”, “blue 7-plum-blue 7”, “blue 7-plum-white 7”, “blue 7-plum-BAR”, “blue 7-plum-” When any combination of “Bell” is completed, a prize is awarded and a replay game (replay) is awarded as a payout.

  "Cherry a", "Cherry b" or "Plum" on the middle reel that makes up the strong cherry 1; "Red 7", "Blue 7", "White 7", "BAR" on the right reel Or any one of the symbols of “Bell” is arranged to be within 5 frames, but the symbols of “Red 7” and “Blue 7” of specific reels that make up Strong Cherry 1 are within 5 frames There is a place that is not arranged. For this reason, even if the strong cherry 1 is won in an internal lottery to be described later, the winning strong cherry 1 is not won if the stop operation of the specific reel is not performed at an appropriate timing.

  The strong cherry 2 is “BAR-Cherry a-Blue 7”, “BAR-Cherry a-Watermelon”, “BAR-Cherry a” on the winning line LN in the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel in the normal gaming state or inside. -"Replay", "BAR-Cherry b-Blue 7", "BAR-Cherry b-Watermelon", "BAR-Cherry b-Replay", "BAR-Plum-Blue 7", "BAR-Plum-Watermelon", " "BAR-Plum-Replay", "Watermelon-Cherry a-Blue 7", "Watermelon-Cherry a-Watermelon", "Watermelon-Cherry a-Replay", "Watermelon-Cherry b-Blue 7", "Watermelon-Cherry b" -"Watermelon", "Watermelon-Cherry b-Replay", "Watermelon-Plum-Blue 7", "Watermelon-Plum-Watermelon", "Watermelon-Plum-Replay" Seen together, it becomes a winning when the uniform, replay game (replay) is given as a dividend.

  In addition, any one of “Cherry a”, “Cherry b” or “Plum” on the middle reel constituting the strong cherry 2, any one of “Blue 7”, “Watermelon” or “Replay” on the right reel One symbol is arranged to be within 5 frames, but there are places where neither the symbol “BAR” nor “watermelon” of the specific reel constituting the strong cherry 2 is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if the strong cherry 2 is won in the internal lottery to be described later, the winning strong cherry 2 is not won if the specific reel is not stopped at an appropriate timing.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the weak cherry 1 is “red 7-red 7-cherry a”, “red 7-red 7” on the winning line LN in the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel in the normal gaming state or inside. -Cherry b "," Red 7-Red 7-Plum "," Red 7-Blue 7-Cherry a "," Red 7-Blue 7-Cherry b "," Red 7-Blue 7-Plum "," Red 7 -Cherry a-Cherry a "," Red 7-Cherry a-Cherry b "," Red 7-Cherry a-Plum "," Red 7-Cherry b-Cherry a "," Red 7-Cherry b-Cherry b " , “Red 7-Cherry b-Plum”, “Red 7-Plum-Cherry a”, “Red 7-Plum-Cherry b”, “Red 7-Plum-Plum”, “Blue 7-Red 7-Cherry a” , "Blue 7-Red 7-Cherry b", "Blue 7-Red 7-Plum", "Blue 7-Blue 7-Cheri a "," Blue 7-Blue 7-Cherry b "," Blue 7-Blue 7-Plum "," Blue 7-Cherry a-Cherry a "," Blue 7-Cherry a-Cherry b "," Blue 7- " "Cherry a-Plum", "Blue 7-Cherry b-Cherry a", "Blue 7-Cherry b-Cherry b", "Blue 7-Cherry b-Plum", "Blue 7-Plum-Cherry a", "Blue When any combination of “7-plum-cherry b” and “blue 7-plum-plum” is completed, a prize is awarded and a replay game (replay) is awarded as a payout.

  "Red 7", "Blue 7", "Cherry a", "Cherry b" or "Plum" on the middle reel that composes the weak cherry 1; "Cherry a", "Cherry b" on the right reel ”Or“ Plum ”is arranged so that it is within 5 frames, but the symbols of“ Red 7 ”and“ Blue 7 ”of the specific reels that make up the weak cherry 1 are also 5 frames. There are places that are not located within. For this reason, even if the weak cherry 1 is won in an internal lottery to be described later, if the specific reel is not stopped at an appropriate timing, the winning weak cherry 1 is not won.

  Weak cherry 2 has “BAR-Cherry a-Cherry a”, “BAR-Cherry a-Cherry b”, “BAR-Cherry a-Plum”, “BAR-Cherry b” in the winning line LN in the normal gaming state or inside. -Cherry a "," BAR-Cherry b-Cherry b "," BAR-Cherry b-Plum "," BAR-Plum-Cherry a "," BAR-Plum-Cherry b "," BAR-Plum-Plum ", “Watermelon-Cherry a-Cherry a”, “Watermelon-Cherry a-Cherry b”, “Watermelon-Cherry a-Plum”, “Watermelon-Cherry b-Cherry a”, “Watermelon-Cherry b-Cherry b”, “ "Watermelon-Cherry b-Plum", "Watermelon-Plum-Cherry a", "Watermelon-Plum-Cherry b", "Watermelon-Plum-Plum" Combination or Re, become a winning when the uniform, replay game (replay) is given as a dividend.

  "Cherry a", "Cherry b" or "Plum" on the middle reel that constitutes the weak cherry 2; any one of "Cherry a", "Cherry b" or "Plum" on the right reel The symbols are arranged so as to be within 5 frames, but there are places where the symbols of “BAR” and “Watermelon” of the specific reel are not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if the weak cherry 2 is won in an internal lottery to be described later, if the specific reel is not stopped at an appropriate timing, the winning weak cherry 2 is not won.

  In this way, the composition pattern of the specific reel in the general role excluding single cherry, middle failure replay, blue right ascending replay, strong cherry 1, strong cherry 2, weak cherry 1 and weak cherry 2 is all within 5 frames. Therefore, when these general winning combinations are won, regardless of the timing of the specific reel stop operation, the constituent symbols of the selected general winning combinations will always stop on the winning line LN of the specific reel. .

  As will be described later, the single cherry is always won at the same time as the weak cherry 1 and the weak cherry 2, and “red 7”, “blue 7”, weak cherry 2 constituting the weak cherry 1 in a specific reel. Since one of the symbols “BAR” and “Watermelon” that make up is placed within 4 frames, when winning a single cherry, the single cherry configuration symbol, the weak cherry 1 won simultaneously Alternatively, the constituent symbols of the weak cherry 2 always stop on the pay line LN of the specific reel.

  In addition, as described later, the middle failure replay and the blue right ascending replay are always won at the same time as the middle stage replay, and the “replay” constituting the middle stage replay in the specific replay is arranged to be within 4 frames. Therefore, at the time of winning the middle failure replay, the composition pattern of the middle failure replay and the composition pattern of the middle stage replay that are won at the same time will always stop at the winning line LN of the specific reel, The blue-up-right replay component design and the middle-stage replay configuration symbol selected at the same time always stop on the winning line LN of the specific reel.

  Further, as will be described later, the weak cherry 1 and the weak cherry 2 are always elected at the same time, and “red 7”, “blue 7”, and the weak cherry 2 that constitute the weak cherry 1 in the specific reel. Since one of the symbols “BAR” and “Watermelon” is arranged within 4 frames, when the weak cherry 1 and the weak cherry 2 are selected, the weak cherry 1 or the weak cherry 2 is configured. Will always stop on the winning line LN of the specific reel.

  Further, as will be described later, the strong cherry 1 and the strong cherry 2 are always elected at the same time, and “red 7”, “blue 7”, and the strong cherry 2 that constitute the strong cherry 1 in a specific reel. Since one of the symbols “BAR” and “Watermelon” is arranged within 4 frames, when the strong cherry 1 and strong cherry 2 are selected, the configuration pattern of the strong cherry 1 or the configuration pattern of the strong cherry 2 Will always stop on the winning line LN of the specific reel.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 17-21, the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for each gaming state will be described. In this embodiment, as described above, an internal lottery is performed only when the gaming state is the normal gaming state or inside, and depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or inside, the role subject to the internal lottery and its Winning probabilities are different. As will be described later as a lottery target combination, a plurality of winning combinations can be read out simultaneously and can be won in duplicate. FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 show combinations of combinations that are read for each lottery target combination, and by indicating “+” between winning combinations, it is shown that the combination is simultaneously read out in the internal lottery.

  In FIGS. 17 to 19, the lottery object combination is shown in the vertical column, and the gaming state is shown in the horizontal column. In the column where the gaming state intersects with the lottery target, a circle indicates that it is a lottery target when in the gaming state, and a cross indicates that it is not a lottery target when in the gaming state. It shows that.

  Also, the numerical values shown below the circles indicate the number of determination values of a predetermined set value (common in this embodiment regardless of the set value). An internal lottery is performed using the number of determination values. The denominator of the number of determination values is set to “65536” corresponding to a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535). For this reason, for example, the winning probability of the lottery subject for which “300” is set as the number of determination values is 300/65536.

  In the normal gaming state, CB, middle left bell 1, middle left bell 2, middle left bell 3, middle left bell 4, middle left bell 5, middle left bell 6, middle left bell 7, middle left bell 8, middle Left bell 9, middle right bell 1, middle right bell 2, middle right bell 3, middle right bell 4, middle right bell 5, middle right bell 6, middle right bell 7, middle right bell 8, middle right bell 9, right left Bell 1, Right-Left Bell 2, Right-Left Bell 3, Right-Left Bell 4, Right-Left Bell 5, Right-Left Bell 6, Right-Left Bell 7, Right-Left Bell 8, Right-Left Bell 9, Right-Middle Bell 1, Right-Middle Bell 2, Right-Middle Bell 3, The right middle bell 4, right middle bell 5, right middle bell 6, right middle bell 7, right middle bell 8, right middle bell 9, common bell A, common bell B, fixed bell, watermelon, normal replay 1 are the internal lottery It becomes a target role.

  When inside, middle left bell 1, middle left bell 2, middle left bell 3, middle left bell 4, middle left bell 5, middle left bell 6, middle left bell 7, middle left bell 8, middle left bell 9 Middle right bell 1, middle right bell 2, middle right bell 3, middle right bell 4, middle right bell 5, middle right bell 6, middle right bell 7, middle right bell 8, middle right bell 9, right left bell 1, Right-left bell 2, right-left bell 3, right-left bell 4, right-left bell 5, right-left bell 6, right-left bell 7, right-left bell 8, right-left bell 9, right-center bell 1, right-center bell 2, right-center bell 3, right-center bell 4, right middle bell 5, right middle bell 6, right middle bell 7, right middle bell 8, right middle bell 9, common bell A, common bell B, confirmed bell, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, firm cherry, normal Replay 2, normal replay 3, and normal replay 4 are targeted for internal lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the middle left bell 1 is a combination of 1 bell 1A + 1 bell 1B + 1 bell 4A + 1 bell 4B + 1 1 + middle bell, and the middle left bell 2 is 1 bell 2 + 1 bell 5 + 1. 1 + middle bell, 1 left bell 3 + 1 bell 6 + 1 1 + middle bell combination, 1 left bell 4A + 1 bell 4B + 1 bell 7A + 1 bell 7B + 1 sheet 1+ Combination of middle bell, middle left bell 5 is 1 bell 5 + 1 bell 8 + 1 1+ middle bell combination, middle left bell 6 is 1 bell 6 + 1 bell 9 + 1 1+ middle bell combination, middle left bell 7 is a combination of 1 bell 1A + 1 bell 1B + 1 bell 7A + 1 bell 7B + 1 1 + middle bell and middle left bell 8 is 1 bell 2 + 1 bell 8 + 1 1 + middle bell The combination of, the middle left bell 9, a single bell 3 + one bell 9 + one 1+ middle combination bell.

  The middle right bell 1 is a combination of 1 bell 1A + 1 bell 1B + 1 bell 5 + 1 1 + middle bell, and the middle right bell 2 is a combination of 1 bell 2 + 1 bell 6 + 1 1 + middle bell. The right bell 3 is a combination of 1 bell 3 + 1 bell 7A + 1 bell 7B + 1 1+ middle bell, and the middle right bell 4 is a combination of 1 bell 4A + 1 bell 4B + 1 bell 8 + 1 1 + middle bell, middle right bell 5 is a combination of 1 bell 5 + 1 bell 9 + 1 1+ middle bell, middle right bell 6 is 1 bell 1A + 1 bell 1B + 1 bell 6 + 1 1+ middle bell combination, middle right bell 7 is 1 Single bell 2 + 1 bell 7A + 1 bell 7B + 1 1+ middle bell combination, middle right bell 8 is 1 bell 3 + 1 bell 8 + 1 1+ middle bell combination, middle right bell 9 One + one bell 4A + one bell 4B is a combination of the bell 9 + one 1+ middle level.

  Also, the right / left bell 1 is a combination of one bell 1A + 1 bell 1B + 1 bell 4A + 1 bell 4B + 1 + 2 + middle bell, and the right left bell 2 is a combination of one bell 2 + 1 bell 5 + 1 + middle bell, right left bell 3 is a combination of 1 bell 3 + 1 sheet 6 + 1 sheet 2 + middle bell, and right and left bell 4 is a combination of 1 bell 4A + 1 sheet 4B + 1 sheet 7A + 1 sheet 7B + 1 sheet 2 + middle section bell, 1-bell 5 + 1-sheet 8 + 1-sheet 2+ middle-bell combination, right-left bell 6 is 1-bell 6 + 1-sheet 9 + 1-sheet 2 + middle-bell combination, right-left bell 7 is 1-bell 1A + 1-sheet 1B + 1-sheet 7A + 1 A combination of 7 bells + 1 sheet 2+ middle bell, right and left bell 8 is a combination of 1 sheet bell 2+ 1 sheet bell 8 + 1 sheet 2+ middle stage bell, right and left The Le 9, a single bell 3 + one bell 9 + one 2+ middle combination bell.

  Also, the right middle bell 1 is a combination of 1 bell 1A + 1 bell 1B + 1 bell 2 + 1 + 2 + middle bell, and the right middle bell 2 is a combination of 1 bell 2 + 1 bell 3 + 1 + 2 middle bell, right middle bell 3 is a combination of one bell 3 + 1 bell 4A + 1 bell 4B + 1 2 + middle bell, and right middle bell 4 is a combination of one bell 4A + 1 bell 4B + 1 bell 5 + 1 2 + middle bell and right middle bell 5. Is a combination of one bell 5 + 1 bell 6 + 1 sheet 2+ middle bell, right middle bell 6 is one bell 6 + 1 sheet bell 7A + 1 bell 7B + 1 sheet 2+ middle bell combination, and right middle bell 7 is one bell 7A + 1 bell 7B + 1 bell 8 + 1 + 2+ middle bell combination, right middle bell 8 is 1 bell 8 + 1 bell 9 + 1 + 2 middle bell combination, right middle bell 9 is 1 sheet Le 1A + one bell 1B + one is a combination of the bell 9 + one 2+ middle level.

  In the following description, the middle left bells 1 to 9 are simply referred to as the middle left bell, the middle right bells 1 to 9 are simply referred to as the middle right bell, and the right left bells 1 to 9 are simply referred to as the left and right unless otherwise distinguished. It is called a bell, and the right middle bell 1-9 may be simply called a right middle bell. Moreover, when it is not necessary to distinguish any of the middle left bells 1 to 9, the middle right bells 1 to 9, the right and left bells 1 to 9, and the right middle bells 1 to 9, they may be simply referred to as push order bells.

  The common bell A is a single right-down bell winning, and when the common bell A is won, a combination of right-down bells is always available. The common bell B is a single winning of the middle bell, and when the common bell B is won, the combination of the middle bells is always prepared. The confirmation bell is a combination of the middle bell and the lower bell, and when the confirmation bell is won, the combination of the lower bell is always aligned.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the fixed cherry is a combination of single cherry + weak cherry 1 + weak cherry 2 + middle replay, strong cherry is strong cherry 1 + strong cherry 2 + middle replay, and weak cherry is weak. A combination of Cherry 1 + Weak Cherry 2 + Middle Replay.

  Normal replay 1 is a combination of middle replay + right-up replay, and normal replay 2 is a combination of middle replay + right-up replay + left failure replay + middle failure replay + red bottom line-up replay + blue right-up replay Yes, normal replay 3 is a combination of middle replay + upward right replay + bell replay + left failure replay + middle failure replay + red bottom row aligned replay + blue right up replay, normal replay 4 is bell replay + middle replay It is a combination.

  In this embodiment, when the push order bell is won, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, a maximum number of small combinations determined according to the type of the push order bell won and the stop order are displayed up to 4 on the winning line. Control is performed so as to stop evenly within the frame drawing range.

  If the middle left bell 1 is elected, the middle bell will win a prize by performing the stop operation in the middle left and right stop order (middle reel, specific reel, right reel stop order). By performing the stop operation in the order of stop, one of the bells 1A, 1 bell 1B, 1 bell 4A, 1 bell 4B, or 1 sheet 1 wins, or none of the roles are aligned. In other words, 8 medals can be obtained when the stop operation is performed in the middle / left / right stop order, whereas one medal is obtained when the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the middle / left / right order. There are cases where it is possible, but there are cases where one medal cannot be obtained.

  In addition, even when the middle left bells 2 to 9 are elected, the middle bell wins by performing the stop operation in the middle left and right stop order, and the stop operation is performed in the stop order other than the middle left and right. Then, one bell won a prize, or neither role is prepared. In other words, 8 medals can be obtained when the stop operation is performed in the middle / left / right stop order, whereas one medal is obtained when the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the middle / left / right order. There are cases where it is possible, but there are cases where one medal cannot be obtained.

  If the middle right bell 1 is elected, the middle bell will win by performing the stop operation in the middle right left stop order (middle reel, right reel, specific reel stop order). By performing the stop operation in the order of stop, either one of the bells 1A, one of the bells 1B, one of the bells 5 or one of the ones wins, and none of the roles are arranged. In other words, 8 medals can be obtained when the stop operation is performed in the middle right / left stop order, whereas one medal is obtained when the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the middle right / left. There are cases where it is possible, but there are cases where one medal cannot be obtained.

  In addition, even if the middle right bells 2 to 9 are elected, the middle bell will win by performing the stop operation in the middle right left stop order, and the stop operation in the stop order other than the middle right left will be performed. Then, one bell won a prize, or neither role is prepared. In other words, 8 medals can be obtained when the stop operation is performed in the middle right / left stop order, whereas one medal is obtained when the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the middle right / left. There are cases where it is possible, but there are cases where one medal cannot be obtained.

  If right / left bell 1 is elected, the middle bell wins by performing the stop operation in the right / left middle stop order (right reel, specific reel, middle reel stop order). By performing the stop operation in the stop order, one of the single bell 1A, the single bell 1B, the single bell 4A, the single bell 4B, or the single sheet 2 wins, or none of the roles are arranged. In other words, 8 medals can be obtained if the stop operation is performed in the order of stoppage in the middle left and right, whereas one medal is obtained in the case of performing the stop operation in a stop order other than the middle right. There are cases where it is possible, but there are cases where one medal cannot be obtained.

  Also, even if the right and left bells 2 to 9 are elected, the middle bell will win by performing the stop operation in the order of stop in the right and left middle, and by performing the stop operation in the stop order other than the right and left center, Either one bell wins or no role is available. In other words, 8 medals can be obtained if the stop operation is performed in the order of stoppage in the middle left and right, whereas one medal is obtained in the case of performing the stop operation in a stop order other than the middle right. There are cases where it is possible, but there are cases where one medal cannot be obtained.

  When the middle right bell 1 is elected, the middle bell wins by performing the stop operation in the right middle left order (stop order of right reel, middle reel, specific reel). By performing the stop operation in the stop order other than the left, one of the single bell 1A, the single bell 1B, the single bell 2 or the single sheet 2 wins, or none of the roles are arranged. In other words, 8 medals can be obtained when the stop operation is performed in the right / left / left stop order, whereas one medal is performed when the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the right / left / right. May be obtained, but there may be cases where a single medal cannot be obtained.

  Also, even if the right middle bells 2-9 are elected, the middle bell will win by performing the stop operation in the right middle left stop order, and the stop operation will be performed in the stop order other than the right middle left. By doing, one bell wins or does not have any role. In other words, 8 medals can be obtained when the stop operation is performed in the right / left / left stop order, whereas one medal is performed when the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the right / left / right. May be obtained, but there may be cases where a single medal cannot be obtained.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when any of the middle left bell, middle right bell, right left bell, right middle bell, that is, the push order bell is won, the stop operation is performed in the operation mode according to the type of the winning combination. By doing so, the middle bell always wins and 8 medals can be obtained, but by performing a stop operation in an operation mode other than the operation mode according to the type of winning combination, one bell wins and 1 You can get one medal or you can't get one.

  For this reason, at the time of winning the push order bell, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out can be changed depending on whether or not the operation is performed according to the type of winning combination. In other words, even if one of the push order bells is won, if the type is not known, a specific operation mode cannot be selected intentionally, and if the stop order matches, eight medals can be reliably obtained. However, if the stop order does not match, even if medals can be obtained, only one medal can be obtained, and no medal can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, when confirmed cherry, strong cherry, weak cherry, normal replay 2, normal replay 3, and normal replay 4 are selected, different controls are performed according to the stop order as shown in FIG.

  When winning a confirmed cherry, stop operation in the left middle right or left / right middle stop order (specific reel, middle reel, right reel stop order or specific reel, right reel, middle reel stop order) Either weak cherry 1 or weak cherry 2 will win, and the middle stage replay will win by performing a stop operation in a stop order other than left middle right or left / right middle.

  When a strong cherry is won, strong cherry 1 is performed by performing a stop operation in the left middle right or left / right middle stop order (specific reel, middle reel, right reel stop order or specific reel, right reel, middle reel stop order). Alternatively, one of the strong cherries 2 wins, and the middle stage replay wins by performing a stop operation in a stop order other than left middle right or left right.

  When winning a weak cherry, weak cherry 1 is performed by performing a stop operation in the left middle right or left / right middle stop order (specific reel, middle reel, right reel stop order or specific reel, right reel, middle reel stop order). Alternatively, one of the weak cherries 2 wins, and the middle stage replay wins by performing a stop operation in the order of stop in the middle left or right or left and right.

  During normal replay 2 winning, the middle stage replay is performed by performing stop operations in the left middle right or left / right middle stop order (specific reel, middle reel, right reel stop order or specific reel, right reel, middle reel stop order). Either right-up replay or winning will be awarded, and stop operation will be performed in the middle left / right or middle right / left stop order (medium reel, specific reel, right reel stop order or middle reel, right reel, specific reel stop order) By doing this, either the red bottom aligned replay, middle replay, middle failure replay or left failure replay will win, and the right left middle or right middle left stop order (right reel, specific reel, middle reel stop order or (Stop order of right reel, middle reel, specific reel)), the right-up replay, middle replay, middle failure replay, left failure replay So that the deviation or to winning.

  In normal replay 3 wins, the middle stage replay is performed by performing stop operations in the order of stop in the middle left or right or left and right (stop order of specific reel, middle reel, right reel or stop order of specific reel, right reel, middle reel) Either right-up replay or winning will be awarded, and stop operation will be performed in the middle left / right or middle right / left stop order (medium reel, specific reel, right reel stop order or middle reel, right reel, specific reel stop order) By doing this, one of blue up-right replay, middle tier replay, middle failure replay, and left failure replay will win, and the left-right middle or right middle-left stop order (right reel, specific reel, middle reel stop order or (Right reel, middle reel, specific reel stop order), and the red bottom row replay, middle row replay, middle failure replay or left failure replay So that the deviation or to winning.

  In normal replay 4 wins, a bell replay is performed by performing a stop operation in the left middle right or left / right middle stop order (specific reel, middle reel, right reel stop order or specific reel, right reel, middle reel stop order). Will be awarded, and the middle stage replay will be awarded by performing the stop operation in a stop order other than left middle right or left right.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, it is controlled to one of the normal gaming state, inside, and CB.

  The normal gaming state is a state in which the winning flag of the CB is not carried over, and the game shifts from the game after the CB ends. In the normal gaming state, regardless of the number of games since the transition to the normal gaming state, when the CB wins, the winning CB wins and shifts to the CB, or the winning CB does not win. End by moving inside.

  The specified number of bets in the normal gaming state is 3, the winning probability of the re-gamer is about 1 / 7.3, and is not controlled by the AT described later, and the medal payout rate per game Is less than 1. In the normal gaming state, the CB can win a game that is won by the CB, and since the probability that the CB is won in the normal gaming state is about 1 / 3.4, in the normal gaming state, about 1 / 3.4. It is possible to win a CB with a probability of 3.4.

  The inside is a state in which the winning flag of CB is carried over, and shifts from the game next to the game won by CB in the normal gaming state. Then, the inside is finished by shifting to CB with CB winning.

  The prescribed number of bets in the inside is 3, the winning probability of the re-gamer is about 1 / 2.4, and when not controlled by the AT described later, the medal payout rate per game Is less than 1, but when controlled by the AT described later, the medal payout rate per game exceeds 1. In the inside, the CB can win a game in which the result of the internal lottery is lost, and the probability that the result of the internal lottery is lost in the inside is about 1/65536. Can win a CB with a probability of about 1/65536.

  CB is a gaming state in which winnings of all small roles are allowed in any game, and transitions from the next game when the CB wins in the normal gaming state or inside. Then, the CB ends when the total number of medals paid out during the CB exceeds 29, and transitions from the next game to the normal gaming state. During CB, one of the small roles always wins and pays out two medals. Therefore, after the start of CB, the game ends in 15 games. In CB, the internal lottery is not performed, and the winning of all the small roles is allowed in any game. However, after the internal lottery is performed, regardless of the result of the internal lottery, However, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which winnings of all small roles are allowed.

  The stipulated number of bets in the CB is 2, and as described above, since the small role always wins and pays out two medals, the payout rate of medals per game is 100%.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16, the CB is won with a probability of about 1 / 3.4 in the normal gaming state. When the CB is won in the normal gaming state, it is possible to win the CB. When the CB wins, the process shifts to the CB, and when the CB does not win, the process shifts to the inside.

  During CB, as described above, the medal payout rate per game is controlled to be 100%, and the game ends in 15 games. After the completion of CB, the game state is shifted to the normal gaming state again.

  In the inside, that is, when the CB winning flag is carried over, if the AT is not controlled as described later, the payout rate of medals per game is less than 100%, while it is controlled by the AT. In this case, the medal payout rate per game exceeds 100%.

  As described above, when a special combination and a small combination are won at the same time, control is performed to prioritize the small combination, and all the small lots that are the targets of internal lottery in the interior are also controlled. The pull-in range of the CB's constituent symbol and the pull-in component's pull-in range overlap in the winning combination, and even if either the push order bell, weak cherry, or strong cherry wins, the small allowed by these lottery results The composition symbol of the combination will stop at the winning line LN. In other words, if any small role is elected in the inside, no CB is won.

  In addition, as described above, when a special combination and a re-playing role are elected at the same time, control is performed so that the re-playing roles are always aligned. If there is, CB will not win.

  Also, inside the internal lottery, any small role or any replaying role will always win unless the result of the internal lottery is 1/65536, so once you move inside, Except for the case where the result is a loss of 1/65536, the CB does not win, and the inside is almost maintained after the inside transition.

  Also, if a CB wins and ends in 15 games, and then transitions to the normal gaming state, if the CB wins with a probability of about 1 / 3.4 and the winning CB does not win, the internal To move inside.

  Even when the setting is changed, the game state and the internal winning flag are maintained in the state before the setting is changed.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since most of the game is controlled inside, the payout of medals according to the set values 1 to 6 on the assumption that the inside is controlled. Whether or not to control to AT in the inside so that the rate becomes a value determined according to each set value, specifically, by setting the winning probability of the navigation stock lottery described later, etc. Medal payout rates corresponding to 1 to 6 are set.

  In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 has a right to control to the AT at the time of winning the lottery target combination (confirmed bell, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, confirmed cherry) outside the penalty period described later. A Navistock lottery will be conducted to decide whether or not to grant stock. In the navigation stock lottery, by determining the number of navigation stocks including 0, whether or not to provide the navigation stock number is determined.

  The number of navigation stocks indicates the number of rights controlled by the AT over a predetermined number of games (50 games in this embodiment). By consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stock by 1, the AT is controlled for a predetermined number of games, and a navigation effect is executed during that time. For this reason, it can be said that the greater the determined number of navigation stocks, the higher the degree of advantage for the player.

  If the navigation stock is won when the number of navigation stocks remains, the number of navigation stocks won this time is added to the remaining navigation stocks.

  The sub-control unit 91 stores the number of navigation stocks in a navigation stock number storage area (to be described later) of the RAM 91c when the number of navigation stocks of 1 or more is determined in the navigation stock lottery except during AT. The sub-control unit 91 specifies whether to control to AT based on the presence / absence of the number of navigation stocks in the RAM 91c. When the number of navigation stocks of 1 or more remains, after AT introduction notification indicating AT winning is performed through a predetermined introduction effect, the navigation stock is subtracted by 1 and AT control is started.

  After the AT starts, the stop order for winning the middle bell when the push order bell is won will be informed, so by performing the stop operation in accordance with the notified stop order, more medals will be paid out from one or the middle bell It is possible to win a middle bell with a certainty.

  The sub-control unit 91 stores, in the RAM 91c, the number of remaining AT games (50 games of this embodiment) executed by the navigation stock when the navigation stock is consumed, that is, at the start of the AT. The sub-control unit 91 subtracts 1 from the number of remaining games in the RAM 91c each time one game is consumed, and controls to AT during a period until the number of remaining games becomes zero. When the number of games remains and the target role of navigation is won, a navigation effect is executed. Thereafter, when the number of remaining AT games becomes 0 and no navigation stock remains, the AT is terminated.

  In addition, when the navigation stock remains, 1 is consumed (subtracted) from the navigation stock number, a predetermined number of games is newly set, and then the AT is controlled to AT during a period until the remaining number of games of the AT becomes zero. To do. Thus, the AT is continuously controlled until the number of navigation stocks becomes zero.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 performs an extra lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games of the AT when winning the lottery target role during the AT. In the extra lottery, by determining one of the game numbers from a plurality of game numbers including 0, whether or not to add the AT game number, and the number of games to be added are determined. When it is determined that the number of AT games will be increased by the additional lottery, the determined number of games is added to the remaining number of games in the RAM 91c.

  If the sub-control unit 91 is controlled by the AT, the sub-control unit 91 executes a navigation effect by winning the navigation target combination. The navigation target combination in this embodiment is a push order bell.

  As for the navigation effect when one of the push order bells is won, the stop order (see FIGS. 22 and 23) for winning the middle bell is notified. For example, when one of the middle left bells 1 to 9 is won, the middle bell can be won by performing a stop operation in the middle left / right order (stop order of middle reel, specific reel, right reel). , “213” and the stop order corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, when one of the middle right bells 1 to 9 is won, the middle bell can be won by performing a stop operation in the middle right / left stop order (middle reel, right reel, specific reel stop order). , “312”, the stop order corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When one of the right and left bells 1 to 9 is won, the middle bell can be won by performing a stop operation in the right / left middle stop order (right reel, specific reel, middle reel stop order). The stop order corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Also, when any of the right middle bells 1 to 9 is won, the middle bell can be won by performing a stop operation in the right middle left stop order (right reel, middle reel, specific reel stop order). Therefore, the stop order corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R such as “321” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  In addition, the aspect of a navigation effect is not restricted to such an aspect, What kind of thing may be sufficient if a player is distinguishable according to a winning condition. Further, the navigation effect is not limited to what is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, but may be executed using the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LEDs 55L, 55C, 55R, and the like.

  Then, by executing the navigation effect, it is possible to deliberately win the middle bell with eight payouts.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the main control unit 41 can acquire eight medals only in the stopping order with the middle reel or the right reel as the first stop when the pushing order bell is won. In the stop order with a specific reel as the first stop when winning the push order bell, either one winning a single medal can be won, or both roles will win It is controlled not to let it.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 sets the stop order other than the stop order in which the specific reel is the first stop, that is, the middle reel or the right reel as the first stop in a situation where the AT is not controlled or the navigation effect is not executed. When a stop operation is performed in the order of stop, which is one stop, the penalty period is controlled over a certain period (10 games in this embodiment). Note that the sub-control unit 91 may execute a navigation effect even when not controlled by the AT, and a navigation effect that notifies the stop order in which the middle reel or the right reel is first stopped is executed. When the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the reel or the right reel is the first stop, there is no control during the penalty period.

  In the penalty period, even if the winning lottery wins, the navigation stock lottery is not performed, the AT is not controlled, or the navigation effect is not executed. The stop operation in the stop order is controlled during the penalty period, which is disadvantageous to the player. In such a situation, the player is prompted to stop the specific reel as the first stop. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the middle bell from winning a prize when the pushing-order bell is won even though it is not controlled by the AT.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 performs control related to the effect reel in accordance with the progress of the game. Control related to the production reel includes normal control and special control.

  The normal control is a control in which the effect reel is changed in a normal change mode similar to the control for changing the game reel according to the progress of the game, that is, the effect reel is moved in a certain direction (in the perspective window 3L) as the game starts. A normal variation control in which the displayed symbol is rotated in a direction that changes from top to bottom) to rotate at a constant speed, and a control that stops the game reel as the game progresses is produced in a normal stop mode. Control for stopping the reel, that is, normal stop control for deriving a display result located in the pull-in range by stopping the effect reel when the corresponding stop switch (stop switch 8L) is operated, for the progress of the game Control that changes the visual aspect of the effect reel to the normal visual aspect as well as the corresponding game reel, that is, all the game reels are stopped after the game reel rotates at a constant speed. In the period until the display result is derived, the visual aspect of the effect reel is changed to the visual aspect of the gaming reel (the transparent state of the transparent area 5b corresponding to the transparent windows 3C and 3R of the liquid crystal display 51, the transparent window 3T). Normal viewing mode similar to the transmission state of the corresponding transmission region 5c and the lighting state of the reel LEDs 55C, 55R, and 55T (transmission state of the transmission region 5b corresponding to the transparent window 3L of the liquid crystal display 51, lighting state of the reel LED 55L) This is normal visual control that is maintained as is, and special control is special variation control that varies the effect reel in a special variation mode different from the normal variation mode in normal variation control, and special control that is different from the normal stop mode in normal stop control. Special stop control for stopping the production reel in the stop mode, and the visual recognition mode of the production reel is different from the normal viewing mode in the normal visual control. Is a special visual control of the viewing aspect. The special control will be described later.

  The sub-control unit 91 indicates whether or not the internal lottery result, whether or not Navistock has been won, and a precursor state (a period in which it is suggested that Navistock may have won after winning the lottery target in the Navistock lottery) Depending on whether the winning probability of Navistock is preferential or not, the control selection lottery that selects normal control or special control depending on etc. is performed, and normal control is selected In this case, the control related to the effect reel is performed by the normal control, and when the special control is selected, the control related to the effect reel is performed by the special control.

  In the control selection lottery, the ratio that the normal control is selected is set higher than the ratio that the special control is selected, and the ratio that the control related to the effect reel is performed in the normal control is the effect reel in the special control. Higher than the rate at which control is performed. For this reason, in most games, the normal fluctuation control for changing the effect reel in the normal fluctuation mode similar to the control for changing the game reel as the game progresses, and the game reel is stopped as the game progresses. Normal stop control for stopping the effect reel in the normal stop mode as in the control to perform, and normal visual control for setting the visual recognition mode of the effect reel as the normal visual view in the same manner as the game reel according to the progress of the game. As a result, in some games, special fluctuation control for changing the production reel in a special fluctuation mode, special stop control for stopping the production reel in a special stop mode, and special visual recognition for the visual appearance of the production reel The special visual control which makes an aspect will be performed.

  In addition, in the control selection lottery, when the target role of the Navistock lottery is won as a result of the internal lottery, the special control is set to be selected with a higher probability than when the other role is won. By performing special variation control for varying the effect reel in the variation mode, special stop control for stopping the effect reel in the special stop mode, and special visual control for setting the visual recognition mode of the effect reel as the special visual recognition mode, It is suggested that there is a high possibility that the target role of the Navistock lottery is won.

  Also, in the control selection lottery, when Navistock is elected and not controlled by AT, special control is performed with higher probability than when Navistock is not elected and is not controlled by AT. It is set to be selected, special fluctuation control for changing the production reel in the special fluctuation mode, special stop control for stopping the production reel in the special stop mode, and the visual recognition mode for the production reel. As a result of the special visual control, the navigation stock is likely to be won, that is, it is suggested that there is a high possibility of being controlled by the AT.

In addition, in the control selection lottery, special control is selected with a higher probability than other periods in the sign state, that is, after the winning of the lottery target of the Navistock lottery, it is suggested that there is a possibility that Navistock is winning In the precursor period, special fluctuation control for changing the production reel in the special fluctuation mode, special stop control for stopping the production reel in the special stop mode, and visual recognition mode of the production reel Since the frequency of the special visual control that makes the special visual aspect, i.e., the special control suggesting that there is a high possibility of being controlled by the AT, increases, the special control is performed after winning the lottery target part of the Navistock lottery. The frequent occurrence can increase the player's expectation for being controlled by the AT.
In particular, in the present embodiment, in the precursor period, the ratio of special visual control that makes it difficult to visually recognize the effect reel by displaying a shutter image on the front side of the effect reel as described later is set high, It is possible to enhance the player's expectation that the AT is controlled by frequent occurrence of special visual control that makes it difficult to visually recognize the effect reel by the shutter image.

  Also, in the control selection lottery, special control is selected with a higher probability when it is controlled to a high probability state where the winning probability of Navistock is favored than when it is not controlled to a high probability state Special fluctuation control for changing the effect reel in the special change mode, special stop control for stopping the effect reel in the special stop mode, and special visual control for setting the visual recognition mode of the effect reel as the special visual check mode. By being performed, it is suggested that there is a high possibility of a high probability state, that is, a high probability of staying in a state where the winning probability of Navistock is preferentially treated.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 pre-determines the number of games until the winning of the navigation stock is notified after the winning of the navigation stock, and in the control selection lottery, Special control with special derivation control that makes it possible to derive specific outcomes indicating the winning of the AT (for example, the outcome in which “White 7” stops when the left reel is interrupted) regardless of the internal lottery result can be selected. In a game in which the winning of Navistock is notified after the winning of Navistock, a specific result indicating the winning of AT can be derived to the effect reel regardless of the internal lottery result in the game.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between the control of the main control unit 41 and the control of the sub control unit 91 according to the progress of the game. FIG. 26 illustrates a case where the normal control is selected as the control related to the effect reel. FIG. 27 is a timing chart showing the operation status of the left reel, the middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel, and FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an operation mode when the normal control is selected as the control related to the effect reel. FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating an operation mode when special control is selected as control related to the effect reel.

  As shown in FIG. 25, when the main control unit 41 detects an operation of the start switch 7 in a state where the game can be started, the main control unit 41 performs an internal lottery and transmits an internal winning command indicating the result to the sub-control unit 91. Then, the rotation of the game reels (specific reel, middle reel, right reel) is started, and the rotation speed of the game reels is accelerated until the rotation speed is constant.

  The sub-control unit 91 that has received the internal winning command performs a control selection lottery and, when normal control is selected, starts the rotation of the effect reel (left reel) and rotates at the same speed as the game reel. The rotation speed of the production reel is accelerated until The visual aspect of the effect reel is maintained in the same normal visual aspect as that of the game reel.

  Further, when special control with special variation control different from variation control of the gaming reel is selected as variation control of the production reel, the production reel is controlled in a special variation mode according to the selected special control. Performs special fluctuation control. In addition, when special control is selected in which the visual aspect of the effect reel is the special visual aspect, the visual aspect of the effect reel is controlled to be a special visual aspect corresponding to the selected special control.

  When the gaming reel rotates at a constant speed, the main control unit 41 validates the gaming reel stop operation by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. When the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected in this state, the game reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is stopped and the display result is derived, and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is performed. Is detected, a reel stop command capable of specifying the gaming reel to stop and the gaming reel to be stopped is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  The sub-control unit 91 that has received the reel stop command determines whether or not the game reel to be stopped specified by the reel stop command is the specific reel, and the game reel to be stopped is the specific reel, and further normal control is performed. If is selected, normal stop control is performed in which the left reel is stopped and the display result is derived in the same manner as the gaming reel.

  In addition, if the gaming reel to be stopped is a specific reel and a special control with a special stop control different from the gaming reel is selected, the effect reel is displayed in a special stop mode according to the selected special control. Special stop control is performed to stop and derive the display result.

  The main control unit 41 repeats the above control until the display results are derived for all the gaming reels, and after the display results are derived for all the gaming reels, the combination of symbols aligned on the winning line LN is obtained. Based on the result, a winning number command indicating the result is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  The sub-control unit 91 that has received the winning number command performs a winning notification effect for notifying that a winning has occurred according to the winning combination when it is specified from the winning number command that any of the winning combinations has been specified. Run.

  When the normal control is selected by the control of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27A, the game is started by operating the start switch 7. The rotation of the left reel, middle reel, right reel, and specific reel starts all at once. Further, the reel LEDs 55L, 55C, 55R, and 55T are all kept in the lighting state for a period from the start of rotation of the left reel, the middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel until all the reels stop.

  Thereafter, when the stop switch 8L is operated among the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in a state in which the middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel are rotated at a constant speed and the stop operation is enabled, FIG. 26 and FIG. As shown in FIG. 26B, when the left reel and the specific reel are stopped, the display results are derived, and the stop switch 8C among the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated, FIG. As shown in FIG. 26, when the middle reel stops, the display result is derived, and the stop switch 8R among the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27 (d), the right reel Stops and the display result is derived.

  If any of the winning combinations wins when all the gaming reels are stopped, the lighting state of the reel LED 55T corresponding to the symbol of the specific reel is not changed as shown in FIG. In the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, the winning combination was won by changing the lighting mode of the reel LEDs 55L, 55C, 55R corresponding to the symbols constituting the later-described staging combination stopped on any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM5. The winning notification effect for notifying the effect is executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the reels are arranged in the order of the left reel as the production reel, the middle reel as the game reel, the right reel, and the specific reel from the left side, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged from the left side. In addition, when the normal control selected in the majority of the game is selected as the control relating to the production reel, all the reels rotate with the start of the game, and then the stop operation becomes effective. When the stop switch 8L located on the leftmost side is operated, the left reel located on the leftmost side and the specific reel located on the rightmost side are stopped, and when the stop switch 8C located second from the left is operated, When the middle reel located second from the left stops and the stop switch 8R located third from the left is operated, the right located third from the left The position of the left reel, the middle reel, the right reel, the specific reel, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the left that stops by the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. From the corresponding relationship among the reel, the middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel, the reels that stop when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated are not the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, but the left reel and the middle reel. , Allowing the player to recognize the right reel and the player, that is, the player can recognize that the reel used in the game is not the specific reel, middle reel, right reel, but the left reel, middle reel, right reel It has become.

  In this embodiment, when normal control is selected, with the start of the game, the rotation of the middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel that are the game reels, and the rotation of the left reel that is the effect reels, However, it is also possible to delay the rotation start timing of one or both of the production reel and the game reel at random, so that the design of the production reel and the design of the game reel are synchronized. By rotating, it is possible to prevent the change mode of the effect reel from becoming a standard for the timing of the stop operation of the game reel. In addition, at least the rotation start timing of either the middle reel or the right reel that requires a stop operation at an appropriate timing in order to win a winning combination such as a watermelon among the production reel and the game reel By adopting a configuration in which the delay is randomly delayed, it is possible to prevent the variation mode of the effect reel from becoming a standard of the timing of the stop operation of the game reel. On the other hand, by adopting a configuration in which the rotation start timing of all reels of the production reel and the game reel is randomly delayed, the variation mode of the production reel serves as a guideline for the timing of the stop operation of the game reel. In addition to the production reel, the rotation start timing is not delayed, and the middle reel and the right reel that are recognized as the reels used in the game together with the production reel, and the production reel The reel can be recognized without distinction.

  Next, normal stop control of the effect reel (left reel) performed by the sub-control unit 91 will be described.

  In the normal stop control, the sub-control unit 91 performs control for stopping the effect reel using the effect stop control table similar to the stop control table used when stopping the game reel.

  The ROM 91b stores in advance an effect stop control table corresponding to the internal lottery result, the stop status of the gaming reels, and the stop position of the stopped game reels. The effect reels are stopped using the effect stop control table corresponding to the internal lottery result, the game reel stop status specified from the reel stop command, and the stop position of the stopped reel.

  The effect stop control table is data that can specify the number of sliding symbols for each timing at which the stop operation (operation of the stop switch 8L) corresponding to the effect reel is performed. As with the reel motors 32T, 32C, and 32R, the reel motor 32L that drives the effect reel uses a stepping motor that makes one round with a cycle of 336 steps (0 to 335), and drives the reel motor 32L for 336 steps. As a result, the reel 2L makes one turn and moves by one symbol by moving it 16 steps. Similarly to the gaming reel, 21 areas (frames) divided every 16 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) are defined for one reel, and these areas have a reel reference position. 0 to 20 area numbers are assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21 as in the case of gaming reels, and symbol numbers 0 to 20 from the reel reference position are assigned to the symbols of each gaming reel. The area numbers 0 to 20 are sequentially assigned to the 20th symbol from the symbol. In the production stop control table, the number of sliding frames for each area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of sliding frames for each area number can be acquired by expanding the production stop control table. It is like that.

  Further, in this embodiment, similarly to the stop control table used for the stop control of the gaming reel, a value of 0 to 4 is set as the number of sliding frames in the effect stop control table, and the stop operation is detected. It is possible to stop the effect reel by drawing in a maximum of 4 frames. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the effect reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The stop position of the symbol can be designated from the range of a maximum of 5 symbols including the stopped operation position.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal stop control, when any of the winning combinations is won, the range of four frames so that the combination of effects corresponding to the winning combination is aligned with any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM5. Use the production stop control table in which the number of sliding frames to be drawn is determined in the range of 4 frames so that the combination of symbols for production corresponding to the winning combination is not aligned with any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM5 The stop control table in which the number of sliding symbols for which any combination of symbols for production is not aligned on the invalid lines LM1 to LM5 is determined when stop control of the production reel is performed. Is used to stop the production reel. Thus, when the stop operation corresponding to the effect reel is performed, the invalid symbol lines LM1 to LM1-5 are arranged for the effect combination corresponding to the winning combination in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. Control to stop is performed, and control to stop the symbol combinations for effects corresponding to the winning combination not to be aligned with the invalid lines LM1 to LM5 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames is performed.

  In this embodiment, the effect reel stop control is performed using the effect stop control table that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed. The stop position is identified from the possible stop position tables, the stop control is performed to stop the effect reel at the specified stop position, and the stop operation is performed without using the effect stop control table or the stop position table. A configuration for performing stop control to search and specify a stop position that can be stopped and stopping the effect reel at the specified stop position, stop control using the stop control table for effect, stop control using the stop position table, for effect Configuration that uses stop control by searching and specifying stop positions that can be stopped without using the stop control table or stop position table, stop control table for production and stop Partially modified the location table may be configured to perform stop control.

  The above-mentioned symbol combination for production is a production reel when a combination of symbols derived on the winning line LN in the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, which are game reels, constitutes one of the roles. It is a combination of symbols that suggest winning of the corresponding role by aligning it on the invalid lines LM1 to 5 on the left reel, the middle reel that is a game reel, and the right reel. Call.

  The relationship between the winning combination and the directing combination will be described below.

  When one bell wins at the time of winning the push order bell, control is performed to stop the “bell” on the upper stage of the left reel. “Cherry a”, “Cherry b”, “Plum”, and “White 7”, “Cherry a”, “BAR”, “Plum” on the right reel are one of “Bell”. Since it is arranged at the lower position, one bell will be awarded on the winning line LN on the specific reel, middle reel, and right reel “Replay-Cherry a-White 7”, “Replay-Cherry a-”. "Cherry a", "Replay-Cherry a-BAR", "Replay-Cherry a-Plum", "Replay-Cherry b-White 7", "Replay-Cherry b-Cherry a", "Replay-Cherry b-BAR" , “Replay-Cherry b-Plum”, “Replay-Plum-White 7”, “Replay-Plum-Cherry a”, “Replay-Plum-BAR”, “Replay-Plum-Plum” When the set is aligned, the “Bell-Bell-Bell” combination is aligned with the upper line, that is, the invalid line LM2, and the combination of “Bell-Bell-Bell” is aligned with the invalid line LM2 as a directing role, so that one bell is obtained. It is suggested that a prize was won. At this time, “replay” is stopped for the specific reel.

  When the middle bell wins when the push order bell, common bell B, and finalized bell are selected, control is performed to stop the “bell” in the middle of the left reel. When the combination of “bell-bell-bell” that the middle bell wins on the winning line LN on the specific reel, middle reel, and right reel is aligned, the combination of “bell-bell-bell” becomes the middle line, that is, the invalid line. As a result of the combination of “bell-bell-bell” being aligned with the invalid line LM1 as a director, it is suggested that the middle bell has won. At this time, the “bell” stops at the specific reel.

  When the right-down bell wins when the common bell A is won, control is performed to stop the “bell” on the upper stage of the left reel. “Red 7” and “Replay” of the right reel constituting the right-down bell are arranged one position above “Bell”, so the right reel is placed on the winning line LN on the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. When the combination of “Replay-Bell-Red 7” or “Replay-Bell-Replay” that will win the falling bell is aligned, the combination of “Bell-Bell-Bell” will be lowered to the right, that is, aligned with the invalid line LM4. Thus, the combination of “bell-bell-bell” is aligned with the invalid line LM4 as a director, suggesting that the right-down bell won the prize. At this time, “replay” is stopped for the specific reel.

  When the lower bell wins when the final bell is won, control is performed to stop the “bell” at the lower stage of the left reel. “White 7”, “BAR” and “Replay” of the middle reel constituting the lower bell, and “Red 7” and “Replay” of the right reel are arranged one position above “Bell”. “Blue 7-White 7-Red 7”, “Blue 7-White 7-Replay”, “Blue 7-BAR-Red” will be awarded on the winning line LN on the specific reel, middle reel, and right reel. 7 "," Blue 7-BAR-Replay "," Blue 7-Replay-Red 7 "," Blue 7-Replay-Replay "," Watermelon-White 7-Red 7 "," Watermelon-White 7-Replay ", When the combination of "Watermelon-BAR-Red 7", "Watermelon-BAR-Replay", "Watermelon-Replay-Red 7", "Watermelon-Replay-Replay" is complete, the combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" That is, it is aligned with the invalid line LM3, Le - a combination of the bell "is the lower bell is suggested that was won by aligned with the invalid line LM3 as director role. At this time, either “Blue 7” or “Watermelon” is stopped on the specific reel.

  When a watermelon wins at the time of winning the watermelon, control is performed to stop “Blue 7” or “Watermelon” on the upper stage of the left reel. Since the “watermelon” of the right reel that constitutes the watermelon is arranged at a position below the “cherry b”, the watermelon will win the winning line LN on the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. When the combination of “Bell-Watermelon-Cherry b” is aligned, the combination of “Blue 7-Watermelon-Watermelon” and “Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon” is lowered to the right, that is, aligned with the invalid line LM4. The combination of “watermelon” and “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is suggested that the watermelon has won a prize by being aligned with the invalid line LM4 as a director. At this time, the “bell” stops at the specific reel.

  When the middle tier replay wins in the final cherries, strong cherries, weak cherries, and normal replays 2-4, control is performed to stop “replay” in the middle of the left reel. When the combination of “replay-replay-replay” that will win the middle stage replay on the winning line LN on the specific reel, middle reel, and right reel is aligned, the “replay-replay-replay” combination becomes the middle stage, that is, the invalid line. As a result of the combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay” being aligned with the invalid line LM1 as a director, it is suggested that the middle stage replay has won. At this time, “replay” is stopped for the specific reel.

  Control is performed to stop the “bell” at the upper stage of the left reel when a right-up replay wins when the normal replay 2 and the normal replay 3 are won. “Red 7” and “Bell” of the right reel constituting the right-up replay are arranged at a position below “Replay”, so that the right reel is placed on the winning line LN on the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. When the combination of “Bell-Replay-Red 7” or “Bell-Replay-Bell” that will receive the upward replay is aligned, the combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay” is increased to the right, that is, aligned with the invalid line LM5. Thus, the combination of “replay-replay-replay” is aligned with the invalid line LM5 as a directing role, and it is suggested that the replay that goes up to the right wins. At this time, the “bell” stops at the specific reel.

  When a bell replay wins during normal replay 4 winning, control is performed to stop “bell” or “replay” at the lower stage of the left reel. “Cherry a”, “White 7”, “BAR” and “Plum” of the right reel constituting the bell replay are arranged one position below the “bell”, so that the specific reel, middle reel, right Bell Replay will win on the winning line LN at Lille “Blue 7-Bell-Cherry a”, “Blue 7-Bell-White 7”, “Blue 7-Bell-BAR”, “Blue 7-Bell-” "Plum", "Watermelon Bell-Cherry a", "Watermelon Bell-White 7", "Watermelon Bell-BAR", "Watermelon Bell-Plum" The combination of “Replay-Bell-Bell” goes up to the right, that is, aligns with the invalid line LM5. bell It is suggested that the play was winning. At this time, either “Blue 7” or “Watermelon” is stopped on the specific reel.

  When a single cherry, weak cherry 1, or weak cherry 2 wins at the time of winning a confirmed cherry, control is performed to stop “Cherry a” or “White 7” in the middle of the left reel. As a result, the combination of “Cherry a-ANY-ANY (ANY can be any symbol)” or “White 7-ANY-ANY” is aligned to the middle stage, that is, the invalid line LM1, and “Cherry a-ANY-ANY” Alternatively, the combination of “White 7-ANY-ANY” is aligned with the invalid line LM1 as a director, suggesting that the confirmed cherry is won. At this time, “cherry a”, “white 7”, “red 7”, “blue 7”, “BAR”, and “watermelon” are stopped on the specific reel. When the normal stop control is selected and the stop switch 8L is operated at a timing at which “cherry a” or “white 7” cannot be pulled into the middle stage, the “watermelon” is stopped at the middle stage of the left reel. Although control is performed, there is no directing role that particularly indicates the winning of the confirmed cherry, and there is no positive suggestion that the confirmed cherry has been won.

  When the normal replay 2 and the normal replay 3 are selected and the red lower stage replay wins, control is performed to stop “red 7” in the lower stage of the left reel. “Blue 7” of the middle reel that constitutes the red bottom tiered replay is arranged one position above “Red 7”, and “Replay” of the right reel is one position above “Red 7”. Therefore, when a combination of “Replay-Blue 7-Replay”, which results in a replay of the lower red line on the winning line LN in the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, is aligned, “Red 7-Red The combination of “7-red 7” may be aligned with the lower line, that is, the invalid line LM3, and the combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” is aligned with the invalid line LM3 as a directing role, and the red lower-level aligned replay won. It is suggested. At this time, “replay” is stopped for the specific reel.

  When the normal replay 2 or the normal replay 3 wins, when blue upright replay or left failure replay wins, control is performed to stop “blue 7” at the lower stage of the left reel. Since the “replay” of the right reel that constitutes the blue right-up replay and the left failure replay is arranged one position below “blue 7”, it is on the winning line LN on the specific reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. When the combination of “Cherry a-Blue 7-Replay” that will win a blue-upward replay or the combination of “Bell-Blue 7-Replay” that will win a left-failed replay is ready, “Blue 7-Blue The combination of “7-blue 7” rises to the right, that is, aligns with the invalid line LM5, and the combination of “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” aligns with the invalid line LM5 as a directing role so It is suggested that the failed replay wins. At this time, either “cherry a” or “bell” is stopped on the specific reel.

  When strong cherry 1 or strong cherry 2 wins when winning strong cherry, or when weak cherry 1 or weak cherry 2 wins when winning weak cherry, control is performed to stop “cherry a” at the top or bottom of the left reel Is called. As a result, the combination of “Cherry a-ANY-ANY (ANY can be any pattern)” is aligned to the upper and lower right, that is, the invalid lines LM2 and LM4, or the lower and upper right, that is, the invalid lines LM3 and LM5. The combination of “cherry a-ANY-ANY” is aligned with the invalid lines LM2 and LM4 or the invalid lines LM3 and LM5 as a director, suggesting that a strong cherry or a weak cherry was won. At this time, “red 7”, “blue 7”, “BAR”, and “watermelon” are stopped on the specific reel. At this time, if “red 7”, “blue 7”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “bell”, “watermelon”, “replay” are stopped in the middle of the right reel, If the winning of cherry is suggested and “cherry a”, “cherry b”, and “plum” are stopped in the middle of the right reel, the winning of a weak cherry is suggested. In addition, when the normal stop control is selected and the operation of the stop switch 8L is performed at a timing at which “cherry a” cannot be pulled into the upper stage or the lower stage, the control to stop the “watermelon” at the middle stage of the left reel is performed. However, there is no directing role that suggests the winning of strong cherries and weak cherries, and there is no positive suggestion that strong cherries and weak cherries have been won.

  Next, special variation control, special stop control, and special visual control performed by the sub-control unit 91 when special control is selected will be described.

  When the special control is selected, the sub-control unit 91 changes the effect reels in a special variation mode different from the normal variation mode in the normal variation control, and the special control different from the normal stop mode in the normal stop control. Special stop control for stopping the effect reel in the stop mode, and special visual control for changing the visual recognition mode of the effect reel to a special visual feature different from the normal visual feature in the normal visual control. These special variation control, special stop control, and special visual control may be performed only when one of the special controls is selected, or when a plurality of controls are duplicated when the special control is selected. Also good.

  The sub-control unit 91 can perform reel reverse rotation, reel low-speed rotation, and reel non-rotation as special variation control.

  As shown in FIG. 28A, the reel reverse rotation is a control for rotating the effect reel in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the game reel at the start of the game. As shown in FIG. 28B, the reel low-speed rotation is a control for making the rotation speed of the effect reel lower than the rotation speed at the constant speed rotation of the game reel. As shown in FIG. 28C, the reel non-rotation is a control that does not rotate the effect reel while the game reel starts rotating at the start of the game.

  The example shown in FIG. 28 is an example of special variation control, and special variation control other than reel reverse rotation, reel low-speed rotation, and reel non-rotation may be applied.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 can perform post-stop symbol conversion, vertical vibration, bounce, over 4 frames, and time difference stop as special stop control.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the post-stop symbol conversion is a control in which the display reels are changed again after conversion of the effect reels and converted into different display results. As shown in FIG. 30 (a), the vertical vibration is a control for moving up and down the reels stopped after the production reels are stopped. As shown in FIG. 30B, the bounce is a control in which the effect reel is suddenly braked to stop the effect reel from vibrating and thereafter the effect reel is kept finely moved. As shown in FIG. 30 (c), the 4-frame super sliding is a control that pulls the display result beyond four frames from the timing when the stop switch 8L is operated. In FIG. 30D, the time difference stop is a control that does not stop the effect reel even when the stop switch 8L is operated, and stops the effect reel when another stop switch is operated.

  The example shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 is an example of special stop control, and special stop control other than symbol conversion after stop, vertical vibration, bounce, 4 frames over slip and time difference stop may be applied.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 can perform shutter display, front display, visual symbol change, backlight extinction, and backlight color change as special visual recognition control.

  As shown in FIG. 31, in the shutter display, it is difficult to visually recognize the effect reel by displaying a shutter image with low transmittance in the region corresponding to the see-through window 3L in the transmission region 51b during the change of the effect reel. In this state, the shutter image is erased after the production reel is stopped, and the production reel is transmitted. As shown in FIG. 32, the front display displays a character image with high transmittance in a region corresponding to the see-through window 3L in the transmission region 51b during the change of the production reel, thereby making it difficult to visually recognize the production reel. In this state, the character image is erased after the production reel is stopped and the production reel is transmitted. As shown in FIG. 33A, in the visual symbol change, if normal control is performed, the reel LED 55L is turned on (on) and the black light LED 56 is turned off (off) so that the normal symbol is conspicuous. As shown in FIG. 33 (b), the reel LED 55L is turned off and the black light LED 56 is turned on (on), whereas the symbol corresponding to the special transmissive region is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize. Thus, it is difficult to visually recognize a normal symbol, and control is performed so that the symbol corresponding to the special transmission region is conspicuous. When the backlight is turned off under normal control, the reel LED 55L is turned on (on) to make it easy to visually recognize the effect reel. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. This is a control that makes it difficult to visually recognize the effect reel by turning off the LED 55L. If the backlight color change is a normal control, the reel LED 55L is in a white state to make it easy to visually recognize the effect reel. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. In this control, the lighting reel is set to a light emitting color other than white so that the effect reel is difficult to visually recognize.

  The example shown in FIG. 32 is an example of special visual control, and special visual control other than shutter display, front display, visual design change, backlight extinction, and backlight color change may be applied.

  In the present embodiment, an effect reel used for effect is provided separately from the game reel whose winning is determined by the derived symbol combination. For gaming reels, for example, to ensure fairness of the game, for example, the amount of movement from when a stop operation is detected until the display result is derived is within a certain range, or while the game is in progress Although restrictions such as keeping the visual aspect of the reel constant are imposed, unlike the reel for gaming, the effect reel does not affect the game result such as winning determination, so In comparison, it is possible to freely design the control for changing the display mode, the control for deriving the display result, and the control for the visual mode of the reel.

  However, simply providing an effect reel separately from the game reel makes it difficult to recognize the effect reel in the same manner as the game reel. Like the above, it can only be recognized as a production device.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the reels are arranged in the order of the left reel, which is an effect reel, the middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel, from the left side, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are arranged from the left side. When the normal control selected in the majority of the game is selected as the control relating to the production reel, when the leftmost stop switch 8L is operated, the left reel When the specific reel located on the rightmost side stops and the stop switch 8C located second from the left is operated, the middle reel located second from the left stops, and the stop switch 8R located third from the left. Is operated, the right reel located at the third position from the left stops. That is, in the positional relationship between the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R and the middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel that are game reels, the stop switches 8C and 8R have the same arrangement order as the arrangement order of the corresponding reels 2C and 2R. Further, in the positional relationship between the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the stop switch 8L is similar to the stop switches 8C and 8R, and the corresponding reel 2L. The stop switch 8L has a corresponding reel in the positional relationship between the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R and the reels 2C, 2R, and 2T. They are arranged in a positional relationship that is different from the 2T arrangement order.

  With such a configuration, when the stop switch 8L operated when stopping both the specific reel as the game reel and the left reel as the effect reel is operated, the stop switch 8L is not the specific reel. Can be recognized as if the left reel, which has the same positional relationship as the positional relationship between the middle reel, the right reel, and the stop switches 8C, 8R as the gaming reel, is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to recognize the game reels separately from the game reels other than the specific reels, and to recognize the effect reels without distinguishing them from the game reels other than the specific reels.

  In this embodiment, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R and the middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel, which are game reels, are arranged in the corresponding reels 2C, 2R. The stop switch 8L is similar to the stop switches 8C and 8R in the positional relationship between the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R and the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. The stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R and the reels 2C, 2R, 2T are arranged in the same positional relationship as that of the corresponding reels 2L. 8L is a configuration in which the reels 2T are arranged in a positional relationship that is different from the arrangement order of the corresponding reels 2T. Among them, the gaming reels other than the specific reels, the positional relationship of the stop switches operated when stopping the gaming reels other than the specific reels, both the effect reels, the specific reels as the game reels, and the effect reels Both of the positional relationship between the stop switch and the stop switch that is operated when stopping the operation are in a specific positional relationship, the stop switch that is operated when stopping both the specific reel and the specific reel and the production reel, If the positional relationship is a special positional relationship different from the specific positional relationship, the left reel as the production reel, the middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel as the game reel, that is, the production reel Even if the arrangement order of the game reels is not the arrangement order as in the present embodiment, the specific reels can be used in the same manner as described above. It is possible to recognize and distinguish the effect reels from the game reels other than the specific reels.For example, the left reel, the right reel, and the specific reels are applied as the game reels, A configuration in which the middle reel is applied as an effect reel, a left reel, a middle reel, or a specific reel may be applied as a game reel, and a right reel may be applied as an effect reel.

  In this embodiment, as the specific positional relationship, a positional relationship in which the reel arrangement order and the corresponding stop switch arrangement order are the same arrangement order is applied, and the reel arrangement order is a special positional relation. However, at least the gaming reels other than the specific reels and the gaming reels other than the specific reels are stopped. Both the positional relationship between the stop switch operated when making the stop and the positional relationship between the effect reel and the stop switch operated when stopping both the specific reel and the effect reel as the game reel The specific positional relationship between the specific reel and the stop switch operated when stopping both the specific reel and the production reel is specific. If the configuration has a special positional relationship different from the positional relationship, even if the specific positional relationship and the special positional relationship are other than the order of arrangement, a specific reel is used in the same manner as described above, and a gaming reel other than the specific reel is used. It is possible to recognize the effect reels without distinguishing them from the game reels other than the specific reels. For example, when the reels are viewed from the front as a specific positional relationship, both sides of the reels are recognized. When the sides or both sides of the fluoroscopic window in which the reel is viewed are extended vertically, the relationship between the corresponding stop switches as a whole overlaps the area between the extension lines of these sides or a part of the corresponding stop switch Is applied as a special positional relationship, and a relationship where no part of the corresponding stop switch overlaps is applied to the area between the extended lines on both sides. As a specific positional relationship, when the connection between the player's center and both sides of the reel or both sides of the see-through window through which the reel is viewed is extended up and down, on the extension of the connection with these sides Apply the relationship where the entire corresponding stop switch overlaps or the portion where the corresponding stop switch overlaps in the sandwiched area, and as a special positional relationship, in the area sandwiched on the extension line of the connection with both sides , A configuration that applies a relationship in which the corresponding stop switch does not overlap at all, or as a specific positional relationship, the length of the connection between the reel or the see-through window through which the reel is visually recognized and the corresponding stop switch, Applying a relationship shorter than the length of the connection with the non-compatible stop switch, as a special positional relationship, the reel or the see-through window through which the reel is viewed and the corresponding slot A configuration may be adopted in which the length of the connection with the top switch is longer than the length of the connection with the stop switch that does not correspond.

  Further, in this embodiment, the shape of the see-through window 3L corresponding to the left reel, which is an effect reel, and the see-through window 3C and the see-through window 3R respectively corresponding to the middle reel and the right reel among the game reels are the same. On the other hand, the shape of the see-through window 3T corresponding to the specific reel which is a game reel is formed to be different from the shape of the see-through windows 3L, 3C, 3R. Therefore, it is possible to recognize the game reels separately from the game reels other than the specific reels, and to recognize the effect reels without distinguishing them from the game reels other than the specific reels.

  In particular, in this embodiment, the shape of the see-through window 3T corresponding to the specific reel as the game reel corresponds to the see-through window 3L corresponding to the left reel as the effect reel, and the middle reel and the right reel among the game reels. Since the shape is smaller than the shape of the see-through window 3C and the see-through window 3R, the specific reel is more effectively distinguished from the game reel other than the specific reel, and the effect reel is a game reel other than the specific reel. Can be recognized without distinction.

  In this embodiment, the shape of the see-through window 3T corresponding to the specific reel that is a game reel is the see-through window 3L corresponding to the left reel that is a production reel, and the middle reel and the right reel of the game reels, respectively. The shape of the see-through window 3C and the see-through window 3R is smaller than that of the corresponding see-through window 3R, but at least the see-through window corresponding to the effect reel and the see-through window corresponding to the game reel other than the specific reel are the same shape or substantially the same shape. On the other hand, the shape of the see-through window corresponding to the specific reel among the game reels is different from the shape of the see-through window corresponding to the effect reel, and the shape of the see-through window corresponding to the game reel other than the specific reel. If so, the specific reel can be recognized and distinguished from the gaming reels other than the specific reel, and the effect reel can be recognized without being distinguished from the gaming reels other than the specific reel. That.

  Further, in this embodiment, the separation width of the left reel and the middle reel, the separation width of the middle reel and the right reel, and the separation width of the right reel and the specific reel are the same, but the perspective window 3L corresponding to the left reel and the middle reel The separation width of the see-through window 3C corresponding to the reel and the separation width of the see-through window 3C corresponding to the middle reel and the see-through window 3R corresponding to the right reel are the same width, whereas the see-through width corresponding to the right reel The separation width of the see-through window 3T corresponding to the window 3R and the specific reel corresponds to the separation width of the see-through window 3L corresponding to the left reel and the see-through window 3C corresponding to the middle reel, and the see-through window 3C corresponding to the middle reel and the right reel. The see-through windows 3L, 3C, 3R, and 3T are formed so as to be wider than the separation width of the see-through window 3R. That is, the reels are arranged in the order of the left reel that is the production reel, the middle reel that is the game reel, the right reel, and the specific reel, and the interval between the perspective window 3L corresponding to the left reel and the perspective window 3C corresponding to the middle reel. The first interval and the second interval that is the interval between the see-through window 3C corresponding to the middle reel and the see-through window 3R corresponding to the right reel are the same, and the see-through window 3R corresponding to the right reel and the specific reel Since the third interval, which is the interval between the corresponding see-through windows 3T, is different from the first interval and the second interval, the specific reel is more effectively distinguished from the gaming reels other than the specific reel for the purpose of production. The reels can be recognized without being distinguished from gaming reels other than the specific reels.

  In this embodiment, reels are arranged in the order of a left reel as an effect reel, a middle reel as a game reel, a right reel, and a specific reel, and a perspective window 3L corresponding to the left reel and a perspective corresponding to the middle reel. The first interval, which is the interval between the windows 3C, and the second interval, which is the interval between the see-through window 3C corresponding to the middle reel and the see-through window 3R corresponding to the right reel, are the same, and the see-through corresponding to the right reel. The third interval, which is the interval between the window 3R and the see-through window 3T corresponding to the specific reel, is different from the first interval and the second interval, but the left reel, which is an effect reel, and the game reel. The reels are arranged in the order of the reel, the right reel, and the specific reel. A first interval that is an interval between the see-through window 3L corresponding to the left reel and the see-through window 3C corresponding to the middle reel, and a see-through window 3C corresponding to the middle reel Perspective corresponding to the right reel The second interval that is the interval of 3R is substantially the same, and the third interval that is the interval between the see-through window 3R corresponding to the right reel and the see-through window 3T corresponding to the specific reel is the first interval and the second interval. Even if it is a structure different from this interval, the specific reel can be recognized separately from the gaming reels other than the specific reel, and the effect reel can be recognized without being distinguished from the gaming reels other than the specific reel.

  In this embodiment, the reels are arranged in the order of the left reel, which is an effect reel, the middle reel, which is a game reel, the right reel, and a specific reel. The reels for the left reel, the right reel, and the specific reel are the first interval, which is the interval between the see-through window 3L corresponding to the left reel and the see-through window 3C corresponding to the middle reel, and the see-through window 3C corresponding to the middle reel and the right The second interval, which is the interval between the see-through windows 3R corresponding to the reels, is the same or substantially the same, and the third interval is the interval between the see-through window 3R corresponding to the right reel and the see-through window 3T corresponding to the specific reel. Is different from the first interval and the second interval, the production reel is the right reel, the game reel is the left reel, the middle reel, and the specific reel, and the see-through window 3L and the middle reel corresponding to the left reel Corresponding to The first interval that is the interval between the viewing windows 3C and the second interval that is the interval between the see-through window 3C corresponding to the middle reel and the see-through window 3R corresponding to the right reel are the same or substantially the same, and the right reel Even if the third interval, which is the interval between the see-through window 3R corresponding to and the see-through window 3T corresponding to the specific reel, is different from the first and second intervals, the specific reel is used for games other than the specific reel. The effect reels can be recognized separately from the reels, and can be recognized without being distinguished from the game reels other than the specific reels.

  Further, in this embodiment, the separation width of the left reel and the middle reel, the separation width of the middle reel and the right reel, and the separation width of the right reel and the specific reel are the same width. The width and the separation width of the middle reel and the right reel are the same width or substantially the same width, whereas the separation width of the right reel and the specific reel is the separation width of the left reel and the middle reel and the middle reel and the right reel. Even when the separation width is different from the separation width of the reels, the first distance that is the distance between the left reel and the middle reel and the second distance that is the distance between the middle reel and the right reel are the same or substantially the same. Since the third interval, which is the same and the distance between the right reel and the specific reel, is different from the first interval and the second interval, the specific reel is more effectively recognized and distinguished from the gaming reels other than the specific reel. The reel for directing is for games other than a specific reel. It can be recognized without distinguishing Lumpur.

  In addition, the production reel is the middle reel, the game reel is the left reel, the right reel, and the specific reel, the first interval that is the interval between the left reel and the middle reel, and the second that is the interval between the middle reel and the right reel. And the third interval, which is the interval between the right reel and the specific reel, is different from the first interval and the second interval, or the effect reel is the right reel, for gaming. The first reel, which is the distance between the left reel and the middle reel, and the second distance, which is the distance between the middle reel and the right reel, are the same or substantially the same. Even when the third interval, which is the interval between the reel and the specific reel, is different from the first interval and the second interval, the specific reel is effectively distinguished from the gaming reels other than the specific reel. A specific reel It can be recognized without distinction as gaming reels other than Le.

  Further, in this embodiment, the winning line LN for which the winning is determined for the combination of symbols stopped on the gaming reel is the symbol of the specific reel at a position shifted by 0.5 symbols from the symbol stopped on the middle reel and the right reel. And the middle reel and the middle symbol of the right reel. In other words, the symbols that pass through the winning line LN to be determined for winning are not arranged in a straight line among the gaming reels, the middle reel and the right reel, and the specific reel. It can be recognized separately from the game reel.

  Further, in the present embodiment, invalid lines LM1 to LM5 for making it easy to recognize that the combination of symbols constituting the winning line is arranged on the winning line LN are set, and the invalid lines LM1 to LM5 are effect reels. Among left reels and game reels, the reels are set to pass through the middle reel and the right reel, and the patterns through which the invalid lines LM1 to LM1 through the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel pass are arranged in a straight line. Therefore, the effect reel can be recognized without being distinguished from the game reel other than the specific reel.

  In the present embodiment, the winning line LN for which the winning combination is determined for the combination of symbols stopped on the gaming reel is the symbol of the specific reel at a position shifted by 0.5 symbols from the symbol stopped on the middle reel and the right reel. And the middle reel and right reel are designed to pass through the middle symbol, making the relationship between the specific reel and game reels other than the specific reel unclear and more effective. It is preferable that the specific reels can be recognized separately from the game reels other than the specific reels. However, the winning line LN for which a winning combination is determined for the combination of symbols stopped on the gaming reels is stopped on the middle reel and the right reel. Even if the design is set to pass the design of the specific reel at a position shifted by 1 design or 2 designs, and the design of the middle reel and the middle stage of the right reel, Since the winning path LN through which the prize is determined does not line up with the middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel among the gaming reels, the specific reel is used for games other than the specific reel. It can be recognized separately from the reel.

  In addition, the winning line LN for which the winning combination is determined for the combination of symbols stopped on the gaming reel is the middle reel, the symbol stopped on the right reel, the symbol of the specific reel at a position shifted by one symbol or two symbols, and the middle reel. In the configuration that is set to pass the middle symbol of the right reel, the symbol in the position where the winning line LN does not pass among the symbols that are stopped in the middle reel and the right reel of the game reel, and the specific reel The position of the symbol may be on a straight line.In such a configuration, control is performed to align a specific symbol on the middle reel, right reel, and specific reel, and also on the left reel. By performing control to align the same specific symbol on a straight line, the effect of aligning four specific symbols on a straight line in the left reel, middle reel, right reel, and specific reel It can be carried out to become.

  Further, in this embodiment, the left reel that is the production reel, the middle reel that is the game reel, the right reel, and the specific reel are all composed of reels of the same width and diameter, but the production reel The gaming reels other than the specific reels may be configured with reels having the same width and the same diameter, and only the specific reels may be configured with reels having different widths and / or different diameters. The reel can be recognized separately from the gaming reel other than the specific reel, and the effect reel can be recognized without being distinguished from the gaming reel other than the specific reel. Further, in such a configuration, it is preferable that the specific reel is constituted by a reel having a narrower width and / or a smaller diameter than that of the effect reel and the game reel other than the specific reel. In particular, the specific reel can be recognized separately from the gaming reel other than the specific reel, and the effect reel can be recognized without being distinguished from the gaming reel other than the specific reel.

  In this embodiment, the left reel, which is an effect reel, the middle reel, which is a game reel, the right reel, and a specific reel, all rotate about the same axis. While a gaming reel other than a reel rotates about the same axis, a configuration may be adopted in which only a specific reel rotates about a different axis. It is possible to recognize and distinguish the effect reels from the game reels other than the specific reels.

  Further, in this embodiment, since the symbols arranged on the left reel, which is an effect reel, and the symbols arranged on the middle reel and the right reel, which are game reels, include a common symbol, It can be recognized without distinction from gaming reels other than the specific reel.

Further, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the symbols arranged only on the specific reels of the gaming reels are not included. For example, as shown in FIG. The design may be different from the symbols arranged on the middle reel and the right reel. With such a configuration, the specific reels are effectively recognized separately from the gaming reels other than the specific reels. be able to.
Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), a part of the symbols arranged on the specific reel may be different from the symbols arranged on the middle reel and the right reel. Thus, the specific reel can be recognized and distinguished from the gaming reels other than the specific reel. In particular, in such a configuration, for symbols that are relatively inconspicuous (such as symbols that are relatively small in size, symbols that are light in color, etc.), a symbol that is common to the middle reel and the right reel is placed on a specific reel, For conspicuous symbols placed on the right reel (such as symbols with relatively large sizes, dark colors, etc.), by not placing them on the specific reel, the specific reel can be effectively used without increasing the number of types of symbols. It can be recognized separately from the gaming reels other than the specific reel. In addition, even if it is a configuration that does not include symbols arranged only on specific reels among gaming reels, symbols that are relatively inconspicuous are arranged on specific reels, and conspicuous symbols arranged on middle reels and right reels By not arranging on the specific reel, the specific reel can be effectively recognized and distinguished from the gaming reels other than the specific reel without increasing the number of types of symbols.

  In addition, as a whole or a part of the combination of symbols for which winning is determined, it is preferable that the symbols constituting the specific reel are configured with relatively inconspicuous symbols. Since the symbols that are relatively inconspicuous on the specific reel sometimes stop, it is possible to effectively recognize the specific reel separately from the gaming reels other than the specific reel.

  In this embodiment, in the winning notification effect executed when any winning combination is won, the lighting mode of the reel LED 55T corresponding to the symbol of the specific reel is not changed, and is invalid for the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. Since the fact that the winning combination has been won is notified by changing the lighting mode of the reel LEDs 55L, 55C, and 55R corresponding to the symbols constituting the later-described stage winning combination stopped in any of the lines LM1 to LM5, it is more effective. The specific reel can be recognized separately from the gaming reels other than the specific reel, and the effect reel can be recognized without being distinguished from the gaming reels other than the specific reel.

  In this embodiment, the lighting mode of the reel LED 55T corresponding to the specific reel is not changed, but the winning combination is achieved by changing the lighting mode of the reel LEDs 55L, 55C, and 55R corresponding to the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. For example, the display mode of the transmission region 51c corresponding to the specific reel of the liquid crystal display 51 is not changed, and the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel of the liquid crystal display 51 are supported. It is configured to notify that the winning combination has been won by changing the viewing mode of the left reel, middle reel, and right reel without changing the viewing mode of the specific reel, such as changing the display mode of the transmissive area 51b. However, the specific reels are more effectively distinguished from the gaming reels other than the specific reels, and the effect reels are not distinguished from the gaming reels other than the specific reels. It can be recognized.

  In this embodiment, the visual appearance of the specific reel is not changed, and the visual appearance of the winning combination is notified by changing the visual appearance of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. For example, when a chance event suggesting a situation advantageous to the player has stopped, or when a specific event such as an internally advantageous situation is suggested, the visual aspect of the specific reel changes. Even if it is a configuration that suggests a specific event by changing the visual appearance of the left reel, middle reel, and right reel, the specific reel is more effectively recognized and distinguished from game reels other than the specific reel. Thus, the effect reels can be recognized without being distinguished from the game reels other than the specific reels.

  In this embodiment, the same symbols are arranged on the invalid lines LM1 to LM1-5 that pass through the left reel, the game reel, the middle reel, and the right reel at the time of winning, while the game reels Stops symbols that are not the same as the symbols on the invalid lines LM1 to 5 on a specific reel and that are not similar (one bell, right-up bell, lower bell, watermelon, right-up replay, bell Replays, red bottom line replays, blue-right ascending replays, left failure replays, etc.), in the case of winning of these roles, the game reels other than the production reels and the specific reels are set to any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM5. While the same symbols are arranged, the symbols that are not the same as the symbols arranged on the invalid lines LM1 to LM1 and are not similar to the symbols on the specific reel are stopped. The more effectively identify reel, to be recognized and distinguished from the gaming reels other than the specific reel, it is possible to recognize the effect reel without distinction as gaming reels other than the specific reel.

  In this embodiment, the same symbols are arranged on invalid lines LM1 to LM1-5 that pass through the left reel, the game reel, the middle reel, and the right reel at the time of winning, while the game reels. Stops symbols that are not the same as the symbols on the invalid lines LM1 to 5 on a specific reel and that are not similar (one bell, right-up bell, lower bell, watermelon, right-up replay, bell Replay, red bottom line replay, blue-right ascending replay, left failure replay, etc.), but the invalid line LM1 that passes through the left reel as a production reel at the time of winning, the middle reel among the game reels, and the right reel While the same or similar symbols are aligned on -5, the same symbols as the symbols aligned on the invalid lines LM1-5 on a specific reel among the gaming reels In addition, it may be configured to include a combination in which a symbol that is neither a similar symbol nor a similar symbol is stopped. Even in such a configuration, the invalid line LM1 is used in a game reel other than the effect reel and the specific reel when winning these combinations. While the same symbols or symbols similar to each other are arranged in any of .about.5, the symbols which are not the same symbols as the symbols arranged on the invalid lines LM1 to LM1 and which are not similar symbols are stopped on the specific reel. Therefore, the specific reel can be recognized more effectively and distinguished from the gaming reels other than the specific reel, and the effect reel can be recognized without being distinguished from the gaming reels other than the specific reel.

  In addition, a similar symbol is, for example, a symbol with the same shape but different in all or part of the color or pattern, a symbol with a different color but with a similar pattern or shape, but the size is the same, but the size is different. The design and shape are the same, but the numbers and shapes are the same, but one is added with a design but the other is not added with a design. Designs with different designs and shapes but with the same location, color, number, size, etc. of the added designs, designs with the same shape but different orientation, and part of the outline Patterns with protrusions and recesses, patterns with different positions, numbers, sizes, etc. of protrusions and recesses formed in part of the outer shape, patterns with the same motif but different shapes (for example, When a common three-dimensional object is cut at different cutting planes ) Such as is applicable.

  Further, in this embodiment, the “watermelon” constituting the watermelon is located beyond the pull-in range in the middle reel and the right reel. Therefore, when the watermelon is selected, the middle reel and the right reel are stopped. If you do not perform the appropriate timing, you will not be able to win the selected watermelon, but on the specific reels, the “bell” that makes up the watermelon is located within the pull-in range, so when you select the watermelon It is possible to win a watermelon regardless of the timing when the reel is operated. With such a configuration, when a watermelon is won, a game reel other than a specific reel determines whether or not a watermelon wins depending on the timing at which the corresponding stop switch is operated, while a specific reel has a corresponding stop switch. Since the watermelon always wins regardless of the timing at which 8L is operated, when the stop switch 8L, which is operated when stopping both the specific reel and the left reel as a production reel, is operated, not the specific reel. In the configuration for recognizing that the effect reel in a specific positional relationship with the stop switch 8L is stopped, it is interesting to operate the stop switch while preventing the player from being disadvantaged. In other words, it is possible to enhance the interest by pushing.

  In this embodiment, the CB and the like are configured to include a combination that cannot be won unless a stop operation is performed at an appropriate timing for a specific reel at the time of winning, but all the combinations are specified at the time of winning. Regardless of the timing of the reel stop operation, it may be configured to be able to win a prize, and with this configuration, it is operated when stopping both the specific reel and the left reel, which is an effect reel. When the stop switch 8L is operated, not the specific reel, but the effect reel that is in a specific positional relationship with the stop switch 8L is recognized as being stopped, which causes a disadvantage to the player. This can be reliably prevented.

  Also, in this embodiment, by placing “bells” constituting watermelons within the pull-in range for specific reels, when a watermelon is won, the watermelons are won regardless of the timing at which the specific reels are operated. The combination of watermelon and symbols other than watermelon (for example, chances of showing an advantageous situation for other roles and players), and the symbol combinations aligned on the winning line LN of the middle reel and the right reel ("Watermelon-Cherry b") can be shared.

  In the present embodiment, by arranging the “bell” constituting the watermelon within the pull-in range in the specific reel, the watermelon can be won regardless of the timing at which the specific reel is operated when the watermelon is won. Although it is a possible configuration, the symbols constituting the watermelon in the gaming reels other than the specific reel are placed on the winning line LN, so that the watermelon can be selected by winning regardless of the type of the symbol stopped on the specific reel. It is possible to make it possible to win a watermelon regardless of the timing at which the specific reel is operated at the time of winning, and by adopting such a configuration, the stop switch 8L corresponding to the specific reel at the time of winning the watermelon. Regardless of the timing when the is operated, the design of the specific reels is constrained in order to make sure that the watermelon is won. It can be prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the configuration in which the effect reel is recognized without being distinguished from the game reel other than the specific reel, the game is in progress in a special variation mode that is not performed in the game reel during the game. Since the special fluctuation control for changing the effect reel is performed at the same time, the gaming reel can be recognized as changing in the special fluctuation mode without being restricted by the control like the gaming reel. .

  Further, in this embodiment, in the configuration in which the effect reel is recognized without being distinguished from the game reels other than the specific reel, the effect reel is used in a special stop mode that is not performed in the game reel while the game is in progress. Since the special stop control for stopping is performed, it is possible to recognize that the game reel is stopped in the special stop mode without being restricted by the control as in the game reel.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when a stop operation is operated while a game is in progress, control is performed so that the stop position located within the pull-in range of the corresponding game reel is stopped by the game reel. When the stop switch 8L corresponding to the specific reel is operated during the progress of the game, the control reel is controlled to stop the stop position located beyond the pull-in range in the effect reel. Thus, the game reel can be made to recognize that the display result has been derived without exceeding the pull-in range.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the configuration in which the effect reel is recognized without being distinguished from the game reels other than the specific reel, the visual aspect of the effect reel during the game is changed to that of the game reel during the game. Since special visual recognition control is performed with a special visual aspect different from the visual aspect, an effect in which the visual aspect of the gaming reel is the special visual aspect is performed without being restricted by the effect as in the gaming reel. Can be recognized.

  In particular, in this embodiment, control is performed to irradiate the gaming reels with the reel LEDs 55C, 55R, and 55T in a predetermined lighting mode during the progress of the game, while a predetermined lighting mode is performed during the progress of the game. Since the special illumination mode (off of the reel LED 55L, the lighting of the black light LED 56, etc.) is controlled to irradiate the production reel with the reel LED 55L and the black light LED 56, or control not to irradiate it, Without being restricted in performance, it can be recognized that the control for irradiating the gaming reel in a special irradiation mode different from the predetermined lighting mode or the control for not irradiating is performed.

  In this embodiment, the special variation control, special stop control, and special visual control can be executed while the game is in progress. Any configuration may be used as long as either of the controls can be executed.

  Also, in this embodiment, as the special visual control, it is difficult to visually recognize the effect reel by displaying a shutter image with low transmittance in the region corresponding to the see-through window 3L in the transmission region 51b during the change of the effect reel. Therefore, the identification information displayed on the game variable display unit during the progress of the game is recognized so that it is difficult to view without being restricted by the performance as in the game variable display unit. be able to.

  In this embodiment, during the change of the production reel, the production reel is displayed by displaying a shutter image with a low transmittance in the area corresponding to the see-through window 3L in the liquid crystal display 51 arranged on the front side. Although it is the structure which makes it difficult to visually recognize, it is good also as a structure which makes the reel for production difficult to visually recognize by moving the shielding member which can shield the see-through window 3L to the near side of the effect reel. Such a configuration not only makes it difficult to visually recognize the effect reel, but also enhances interest by the operation of the shielding member.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the winning state, that is, after the winning of the lottery subject in the Navistock lottery, the shutter image is produced with a higher probability than the other periods during the period in which the possibility that Navistock is winning is suggested. The special visual control that makes it difficult to visually recognize the reel is executed, and it is possible to estimate the possibility that the stage reel is advantageous for the player based on the frequency at which the effect reel becomes difficult to visually recognize due to the shutter image.

  In this embodiment, it is a configuration that suggests the possibility that Navistock is elected as a situation that is advantageous to the player, but at least a configuration that suggests a situation that is advantageous to the player may be used. Situations such as situations in which rights that are advantageous to the player are granted, situations in which there is a high probability that rights that are advantageous to the player are granted, situations in which the number of games is controlled to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, etc. Is applicable. Here, the right that is advantageous to the player is a right that makes it possible to shift to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (winning a lottery to determine whether or not to generate the advantageous state, shifting to the advantageous state Winning is permitted, etc.), a right to be notified of an operation mode for deriving a display result advantageous to the player, a right to be controlled to a gaming state with a high expected value to which a gaming value is given, The right to be notified whether or not the gaming state is a gaming state advantageous to the player, the period during which the gaming state is controlled to the advantageous state (the number of fixed games, the average value of the number of games that vary depending on the end condition, etc.), and the like.

  Also, in this embodiment, the stage reel is not made difficult to visually recognize in most games, and the stage reel is temporarily made difficult to visually recognize. Is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize, and only in a situation that is advantageous to the player (high probability state of Navistock, during AT, etc.), the production reel is in a state where it can be seen, and a situation that is advantageous to the player using the production reel It is also possible to have a configuration that provides a specific performance in the game, and it is possible to visually recognize the production reel during normal times, and it is difficult to see the production reel in situations that are advantageous to the player (high probability of navigation stock, during AT, etc.) It is good also as a structure which makes it a state and performs an effect peculiar in normal time using the reel for production. Also, as in the push order bell, the middle bell won't win in the middle left / right or left / right middle stop order, and the middle bell won only in the middle left / right, middle right left, right left middle, right middle left stop order. In the configuration, as a navigation effect at the time of winning the push order bell, by making the effect reel corresponding to the stop switch 8L difficult to see, the apparent probability is 1/6 (left middle right, left right middle, middle Left / right, middle right / left, right / left middle, right / middle left) to 1/4 (middle left / right, middle right / left, right / left middle, right middle / left).

  Next, various control contents executed by the main control unit 41 in this embodiment will be described below.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game process executed by the main control unit 41 after the setting change process. In the game process, a BET process (S1), an internal lottery process (S2), a reel rotation process (S3), a winning determination process (S4), a payout process (S5), and a game end process (S6) are executed in order. When the end-time process ends, the process returns to the BET process again.

  In the BET process in S1, the main control unit 41 stands by in a state where the bet number can be set, and a predetermined number of bets according to the gaming state is set, and the game is started when the start switch 7 is operated. Execute the process. Further, in the BET process, a rip freeze process for generating a rip freeze accompanying a predetermined replay winning (bell lip winning) can be executed. In addition, as a process for starting the game, the main control unit 41 outputs an output command for instructing output of a medal IN signal for the number of medals used for the set bet number when the start switch 7 is operated. Set to.

  In the internal lottery process in S2, a process is performed for determining whether or not winning of each combination is permitted based on a random number value for internal lottery latched simultaneously with the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 in S1. In this internal lottery process, a winning flag is set in the RAM 41c based on the respective lottery results.

  In the reel rotation process in S3, the main control unit 41 stops the rotation of the corresponding game reel in response to the process of rotating the game reel and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player being detected. Execute the process.

  In the winning determination process in S4, when the main control unit 41 determines in S4 that the rotation of all the gaming reels has stopped, whether or not a winning has occurred according to the display result derived for each gaming reel. The process which determines is performed.

  In the payout process in S5, when it is determined in S4 that a winning has occurred, the main control unit 41 adds a credit based on the number of payouts according to the type of the small combination, if the winning is a small combination. Processing such as paying out medals is performed, and in the case of a re-game player, a re-play game flag that can specify the type of the re-game player is set in the RAM 41c and a re-play game can be given. In the payout process, the main control unit 41 sets an output command instructing the RAM 41c to output a medal OUT signal for the number of medals given to the player by adding credits and paying out medals.

  In the game end process in S6, the main control unit 41 executes a process of setting a gaming state in preparation for the next game. In the game process, a command is generated according to the progress control of the game and set in the command queue, so that the command set to the sub-control unit 91 is transmitted in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main). It has become so.

Next, the BET process executed by the main control unit 41 in S1 of the game process will be described. 36 to 39 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the BET process executed by the main control unit.
In the BET process, first, the value of the BET counter in which the value of the betting number is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is cleared (S10), and a predetermined number according to the gaming state (in this embodiment, any game, like the upper limit number) Even in the state, 3) is set in the RAM 41c (S11), and the next game (game started from now) is replayed based on whether or not the replay game flag indicating that it is a replay game is set in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not (S12).

  If it is determined in S12 that the next game (game to be started from now) is a replay game, a rip freeze process for generating a rip freeze at the time of winning the bell replay is executed (S13). The reply freeze process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the rip-freeze process is completed, the replay won in the previous game in S14 is the first replay (the director is composed only of “Replay” symbols, and “Replay” is placed on any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM5. It is determined whether or not the replaying players are in a uniform state, and in this embodiment, the middle stage replay and the right-up replay). Whether or not it is the first replay is specified from the set replay game flag. If it is determined in S14 that the first replay has been made, the bet number is added in S15 (because there are three bets in the replay winning state), and a BET sound is output by the sub-control unit 91 A BET command indicating that there is a BET sound to be performed (for convenience, in S15, “BET command (with BET sound)”) is set in the command queue.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S14 that it is not the first replay, that is, the second replay (the replaying role is constituted by a symbol combination including a symbol other than the “replay” symbol in the replaying role. In the case of bell replay, strong cherry 1, 2, weak cherry 1, 2, etc.), there is no BET sound that the bet number is added by 3 in S16 and that the BET sound is not output by the sub-control unit 91 A BET command indicating “BET command (no BET sound)” for the sake of convenience in S16, and so on) is set in the command queue. The BET command set in S15 and S16 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main). Thereby, on the side of the sub-control unit 91, a bet sound is output every time the bet number is set after the first replay winning, whereas the bet number is set after the second replay winning. Does not output a BET sound. This makes it easier for the player to notice the first replay prize, while making it difficult for the player to notice the second replay prize.

  In S17, 1 is added to the value of the BET counter, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to, and whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (here, 3), that is, the game start condition and It is determined whether or not a bet number is set (S18). If the value of the BET counter is not a specified number, the process returns to S17. When the value of the BET counter becomes the specified number and the setting of the bet number by replay winning is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter, which is the value of credit stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, is the upper limit value of 50. (S19).

  After the value of the BET counter is added, the main control unit 41 executes processing for sequentially lighting the 1BETLED 14, 2BETLED15, and 3BETLED16 according to the value of the BET counter. Further, the main control unit 41 executes a process of lighting the replaying LED 20 and the start valid LED 18 (waiting LED 19 during waiting) after the setting of the betting number after the replay winning is completed.

  When it is determined in S19 that the value is the upper limit value, an insertion impossible flag indicating that the medal cannot be inserted is set in the RAM 41c (S20), and the process proceeds to S22 (E1). If it is determined in S19 that the value is not the upper limit value, that is, if it is determined that a credit can be inserted, the process proceeds to S21 (E2). If it is determined in S12 that the game is not a replay game, the process directly proceeds to S21. In S21, the setting before waiting for input is performed, and the process proceeds to S22. In the setting before waiting for insertion, the insertion prohibition flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared, and a medal can be inserted. For this reason, after a replay win, the medals that were put in before the setting of the betting number is completed and the setting before waiting to be put in has not been accepted will be accepted, and the setting of the betting number will be completed and inserted. The medals inserted after the setting before waiting is effectively received and credits are added. The main control unit 41 turns on the insertion request LED 17 after the setting before waiting for insertion and clears the insertion prohibition flag in S21. When the bet number can be set, the main control unit 41 sets the BET switch valid LED 21. Execute the process to light up.

  In S22, it is determined whether or not a medal can be inserted based on whether or not the insertion prohibition flag is set in the RAM 41c. If it is determined in S22 that the medal can be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, and the medal can be inserted using the medal flow path as a path on the hopper tank side ( S23), the process proceeds to S25, and if it is determined that the medal cannot be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the medal flow path is used as a path on the medal payout exit 9 side. Is prohibited (S24), and the process proceeds to S25.

  In S25, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is on. If the setting key switch 37 is on, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (S26). If the value of the BET counter is 0 in S26, a confirmation start command is set in the command queue (S27), and the setting confirmation processing (S28), that is, the setting confirmation state is entered. The confirmation start command set in S27 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main). Moreover, after the setting confirmation process in S28 is completed, the process returns to S22. If the setting key switch 37 is not on in S25, or if the value of the BET counter is not 0 in S26, the process proceeds to S30 (E3).

  In S30, it is determined whether or not the detection result of the inserted medal sensor 31 is an appropriate detection result and whether or not the insertion medal has been detected, that is, whether or not there is an insertion medal flag indicating that the insertion medal has been detected. If the passage of the inserted medal is not detected in S30, the process proceeds to S45. If the passage of the inserted medal is detected, the inserted medal flag is cleared (S31), and whether or not the insert impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not a medal can be inserted (S32). If the medal cannot be inserted, the process proceeds to S45.

  If the medal can be inserted in S32, the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to determine whether the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number (S33), and the value of the BET counter If the number is not the specified number, a BET command (with BET sound) indicating that the bet number is incremented by 1 and that the BET sound is output by the sub-control unit 91 is set in the command queue (S34). ), 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (S35), and the process returns to S22. The BET command set in S34 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main). Thereby, when the bet number is set by inserting medals, a BET sound is output on the sub-control unit 91 side.

  If the value of the BET counter is a prescribed number in S33, it is determined in S36 whether or not the second replay has been won in the previous game. Whether or not it was the second replay is specified from the replay game flag. If it is determined in S36 that the second replay has not been won in the previous game, a credit command indicating that the credit control value is output by the sub-control unit 91 and the value of the credit counter after one addition is displayed in S38. (In S38, “credit command (normal)” is shown for convenience. The same applies hereinafter) is set in the command queue, and in S40, the value of the credit counter in which the credit value is stored in the RAM 41c is incremented by one. The credit command set in S38 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

  If it is determined in S36 that the second replay has been won in the previous game, it is determined in S37 whether or not a predetermined number of BET sounds have been output. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the credit command shown in S39 is output three times as many as the specified number. When the bet amount is set after the second replay winning, since the BET command (no BET sound) is output as shown in S18, the BET sound is not output in the sub-control unit 91. For this reason, after the second replay winning, after the bet number is set, when a medal is inserted and credited, a process for outputting the BET sound up to a specified number of times is performed.

  In S37, when a predetermined number of BET sounds have not been output, a credit command indicating the value of the credit counter after 1 addition and indicating that the sub-control unit 91 outputs a credit sound in S39 (in S39, for convenience) "Credit command (with BET sound)" (the same applies hereinafter) is set in the command queue, and 1 is added to the value of the credit counter that stores the credit value in the RAM 41c in S40. The credit command set in S39 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main). On the other hand, when a predetermined number of BET sounds have already been output in S37, the process proceeds to S38, and a credit command (normal) is set in the command queue. As a result, when adding credits by inserting medals after the second replay winning, on the sub-control unit 91 side, BET sounds are output for up to the third sheet, and credit sounds are output for the fourth and subsequent sheets. The On the other hand, when adding credits by inserting medals when it is not after the second replay winning, a credit sound is output from the first sheet on the sub-control unit 91 side. As the next step of S36 and S37, after executing S40, the corresponding S38 or S39 processing is performed, so that a credit command indicating the current value after being added by S40 as the value of the credit counter is displayed in S38. Or you may make it set in S39. In addition, since a predetermined number of bets are set after the release of the rip freeze at the second replay winning, a command for outputting a predetermined number of BET sounds as a credit command (with a BET sound) is issued in S39. It may be set to output a predetermined number of BET sounds.

  In S41, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 50 which is the upper limit value. If the value of the credit counter is not 50, the process returns to S22, and if the value of the credit counter is 50, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c in S42, and the process returns to S22.

  In S45, it is determined whether or not an operation of the start switch 7 is detected, that is, whether or not a rising edge indicating a rising edge of the start switch 7 is set. Furthermore, the rising edge is set only when any switch is turned on and all the switches are turned off. In S45, in addition to whether any switch is turned on or not, the other edge is set. Whether or not the switch is OFF is also determined.

  If it is determined in S45 that the operation of the start switch 7 has not been detected, or if another switch for which the start switch 7 has been operated is operated, the process proceeds to S51, where the operation of the start switch 7 is valid. If detected, the process proceeds to S46, and the rising edge is cleared. In S47, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is the specified number, that is, whether or not the bet number as a game start condition is set.

  If the value of the BET counter is not the prescribed number in S47, the process returns to S22 (E1). In the off state, the medal inserted through the medal flow path on the medal payout exit 9 side is returned, and the setting at the start of the game is performed in S49. Thereby, even if a medal is inserted until the setting is made before waiting for insertion in S21 in the BET processing after the next game after the game is started, the medal payout opening 9 is not accepted. Will be paid out. Then, after S49, the BET process is terminated and the process proceeds to S2 in FIG.

  In S51, it is determined whether or not the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, that is, whether or not the rising edge indicating the rising of the MAXBET switch 6 is set. If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not detected in S51, the process proceeds to S52. If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, the process proceeds to S75 in FIG. 38, and the rising edge is cleared.

  In S76, with reference to the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 41c, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number. If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in S76, the process proceeds to S80, and if the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 in S77. If the value of the credit counter is 0 in S77, the process proceeds to S80. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in S77, 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter in S78, 1 is added to the value of the BET counter in S79, and the process returns to S76.

  In S80, it is determined whether or not the BET counter is added. If the BET counter is not added, the process returns to S22. In addition, when the BET counter in S80 is added, not only the addition in S79 but also the addition in S14 after the rip freeze is canceled by the MAXBET switch 6 operation. On the other hand, if the BET counter is added, a BET command (BET sound) indicating that the bet number added in S81 is added and that the BET sound is output by the sub-control unit 91 to output a BET sound. Yes) is set in the command queue and the process proceeds to S22. The BET command set in S81 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main). As a result, when the bet amount is set by operating the MAXBET switch 6, the BET sound is output for the set bet amount on the sub-control unit 91 side.

  If the BET counter is not added in S80, it is determined in S82 whether or not the second replay has been won in the previous game. If it is determined in S82 that the second replay has not been won in the previous game, the process returns to S22 (E1). If it is determined in S82 that the second replay was won in the previous game, it is determined in S83 whether or not a prescribed number of BET sounds have been output. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a credit command or a BET sound command is output three times as many as a specified number. When the bet number is set after the second replay winning, since the BET command (no BET sound) is output as shown in S15, the BET sound is not output in the sub-control unit 91. For this reason, after the second replay winning, after the betting number is set, when the MAXBET switch 6 is operated, a process for outputting the BET sound up to a specified number of times is performed.

  If the specified number of BET sounds are output in S83, the process returns to S22 (E1). If the specified number of BET sounds is not output in S83, the output of the BET sound is instructed in S84. Is set in the command queue and the process returns to S83. The BET sound command set in S84 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

  In S52, it is determined whether or not an operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, that is, whether or not a rising edge indicating the rising of the settlement switch 10 is set. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected in S52, the process returns to S22. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the process proceeds to S53 and the rising edge is cleared. In S54, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game based on whether or not the replay game flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  If it is not determined that the game is a replay game in S54, it is determined in S56 whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0. If the value of the BET counter is not 0, the process proceeds to S57, and the hopper motor 34b is driven to operate the BET counter. Control for paying out medals corresponding to the value stored in (that is, control for returning the medals used for setting the number of bets and setting the value of the BET counter to 0), starting the payout of medals, and adjusting the number of bets The betting number settlement process for setting the payout start command to notify the command queue to the command queue is performed. After the betting amount adjustment process in S57, the insertion impossible flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared in S58, and the process returns to S22. As a result, when the betting amount is settled by operating the settlement switch 10 in a state where the betting amount is set, not after the replay winning, the sub-control unit 91 displays that the betting amount is being settled. And a sound corresponding to the betting amount adjustment is output.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S54 that the game is a replay game or when it is determined in S56 that the value of the BET counter is 0, the value stored in the credit counter by driving the hopper motor 34b in S59. Control for paying out medals for the minute (that is, control for returning medal memorized as credits and setting the value of the credit counter to 0), notifying the start of paying out medals, and credit settlement in the replay game A credit settlement process is performed to set a payout start command for notifying whether there is a credit settlement when there is a bet amount or not in the command queue. After the credit settlement process in S59, in S58, the insertion impossible flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared and the process returns to S22. Thereby, when the settlement is performed by operating the settlement switch 10 in the replay winning, only the credit settlement is performed without performing the betting number settlement, and the credit after the replay winning is performed on the sub-control unit 91 side. A message indicating that the account is being settled is displayed, and a sound corresponding to the credit settlement after the replay winning is output. Further, when the settlement is performed by operating the settlement switch 10 when the value of the BET counter is 0, the sub-control unit 91 side indicates that the credit settlement when the value of the BET counter is 0 is being performed. In addition to being displayed, a sound corresponding to credit settlement when the value of the BET counter is 0 is output.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the rip freeze process executed by the main control unit 41 in S13 of the BET process.
The rip freeze process is performed when it is determined that the game is a replay game, that is, after the re-gamer wins in the previous game. In S85, it is determined whether or not the replay won in the previous game was a bell replay in the second replay. When it is determined that the replay is not bell-play, the freeze-freeze process is terminated without generating any freeze.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the bell replay has occurred, the timing at which the bet amount is set by the replay winning or the start switch 7 is activated until the determination of YES in any of S89 to S92 and the freeze release condition is satisfied. A process for generating a freeze (lip freeze) is performed.

  In S86, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is the upper limit value of 50. When it is determined in S86 that the value is not the upper limit value, credits can be added. Therefore, in S87, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, and a medal can be inserted using the medal flow path as a path on the hopper tank side. In S88, a process for lighting the insertion request LED 17 and the BET switch valid LED 21 is performed in S88. Thereby, in particular, MAXBET operation, medal insertion, etc. can be promoted.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S86 that the value of the credit counter is 50, which is the upper limit value, credit addition is impossible, and the process proceeds to S89 without performing the process of S87 and the like. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the inserted medals flow down to the hopper tank side while the credit counter is 50, and neither the credit nor the bet number is added by the medals. Can do.

  In S89, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the rip freeze. When it is determined in S89 that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the lip freeze, the rip freeze release condition is satisfied.

  If it is determined in S89 that a predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the rip freeze, it is determined in S90 whether or not the player has performed a MAXBET operation using the MAXBET switch 6. When it is determined in S90 that the player has performed a MAXBET operation, the rip-freeze release condition is satisfied.

  When it is determined in S90 that there is no MAXBET operation by the player, in S91, the inserted medal sensor 31 in which the medal inserted from the medal inserting unit 4 is arranged on the hopper tank 34a side with respect to the flow path switching solenoid 30 is provided. It is determined whether or not it is detected by a sensor arranged on the most upstream side among the plurality of sensors (that is, a sensor capable of detecting the inserted medal first (this sensor is also referred to as a specific sensor)). The passage of the medal is detected by the specific sensor when the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on in S87. When it is determined in S91 that a medal has been inserted, the rip freeze release condition is satisfied. Even when it is determined in S91 that a medal has been inserted, the insertion of a medal has not yet been detected by another sensor, and the detection result by the insertion medal sensor 31 is not an appropriate detection result. The flag is not set.

  If it is not determined in S91 that a medal has been inserted, it is determined in S92 whether or not there has been a credit settlement operation using the settlement switch 10 by the player. When it is determined in S92 that the player has made a credit checkout operation, the rip-freeze release condition is satisfied. Further, after the freeze is canceled by the credit settlement operation, the credit settlement process is performed through the YES determination in S52 of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in S92 that there is no credit settlement operation by the player, the process returns to S89.

  After the freeze release condition is established, in S93, when the flow path switching solenoid 30 is in the on state, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the rip freeze processing is ended. In the reply freeze process, the process of S93 is performed. Thus, for example, even when a rip freeze occurs when the credit counter is 49 and a plurality of medals are inserted at once, the freeze release condition is satisfied by detecting the first of them by a specific sensor. After that, immediately after the flow path switching solenoid is turned off in S93 and the freeze-freeze processing is ended, the first medal is further detected by another sensor, and the detection result by the insertion medal sensor 31 is appropriate. When the detection result is set and the insertion medal flag is set, YES is determined in S30 of FIG. 37, the credit counter is updated to 50 in S40, YES is determined in S19 of FIG. 36, and the insertion disable flag is set in S20. Since the flow path switching solenoid is turned off, the second and subsequent medals out of the plurality of medals It is paid out from the payout opening 9. The plurality of sensors included in the inserted medal sensor 31 are detected by other sensors after the first medal is detected by the specific sensor and the detection result by the inserted medal sensor 31 when a plurality of medals are inserted at a time. Is shorter than the time required for the second medal to reach the flow path switching solenoid 30 after the first medal is detected by the specific sensor. Are arranged as follows. For this reason, when the credit 50 is reached by inserting the first medal, the flow path switching solenoid is always turned off when the second and subsequent medals reach the flow path switching solenoid 30. The medals after the first can be paid out from the medal payout exit 9. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that credits are not added and returned even though medals are inserted.

  On the other hand, when a rip freeze occurs when the credit counter is less than 49 and a plurality of medals are inserted at once, the freeze release condition is established by detecting the first of them by a specific sensor. Thereafter, the flow path switching solenoid is immediately turned off in S93, but immediately after that, it is determined NO in S19 of FIG. 36, and the setting before waiting for input is performed in S21, and the flow path switching solenoid is turned on. Since the on state is maintained until the credit 50 is reached, the second and subsequent medals out of the plurality of medals are also taken in (added to the credit 50) and added to the credit. Thereby, the convenience when a medal is inserted during the rip freeze can be improved.

  Next, the timing at which medal insertion or settlement is allowed after the game is over will be described. 40 (a) to 40 (d) are diagrams for explaining an example of the timing at which the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after the game is ended by executing the BET process shown in FIGS. 36 to 39. It is.

  FIG. 40 (a) is a diagram for explaining the timing at which insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after no medal payout without winning a small role. If no small role winning has occurred, the game is finished without paying out, and thereafter, the process of S6 of FIG. 35, the process of S1 for the next game, and the processes of S10 to S12 of FIG. After the processing is executed, the processing after S21 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 40 (a), insertion or settlement of medals is allowed.

  FIG. 40B is a diagram for explaining the timing at which insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after a small role is won and medals are paid out. If a small role winning has occurred, the game ends after the payout has been made, and thereafter, the process of S6 in FIG. 35, the process of S1 for the next game, and the processes of S10 to S12 of FIG. After the processing is executed, the processing after S21 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 40B, insertion or settlement of medals is allowed.

  FIG. 40C is a diagram for explaining the timing at which insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after the normal replay (middle stage replay, right-up replay) wins. If a normal replay winning has occurred, the game ends without payout, and then the processing of S6 in FIG. 35, the processing of S1 for the next game, and the processing of S10 to S12 of FIG. In addition to the processing, after the bet number setting is completed and after it is determined in S19 that credit is possible, the processing after S21 is executed, as shown in FIG. 40 (c). Medals can be inserted or settled.

  FIG. 40D is a diagram for explaining the timing at which medal insertion or settlement is permitted after the Bell Replay wins. If the bell replay is won, the game is finished without paying out, and then the process of S6 in FIG. 35, the process of S1 for the next game, and the processes of S10 to S12 in FIG. 39 is executed, the freeze-freeze process shown in FIG. 39 is executed, and the freeze-free control is performed until the freeze-free release condition is satisfied. During this time, as shown in S87 of FIG. 38, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on to permit insertion of a medal for releasing the freeze, and a credit settlement operation or a MAXBET operation for releasing the freeze. Is also allowed. When the rip-freeze release condition is satisfied, after it is determined that credits are possible in S19 of FIG. 36 after the betting amount setting is completed, the processing in S21 and subsequent steps is executed, and the process shown in FIG. Thus, normal medal insertion or settlement is allowed.

  During rip freeze, medal insertion and credit settlement operation for freezing release are allowed, and normal medals after rip freeze is canceled and bet number is set in conjunction with medal insertion and credit settlement operation during rip freeze Is charged or settled. Even during the rip freeze, when the value of the credit counter has already reached 50, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is not turned on in S87 of FIG. 38. It will be allowed later.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even if a medal is inserted after the replay winning is generated and before the replay game is started (reel rotation start), the betting number setting (automatic If a medal is detected after the bet is placed and the next replay game can be started, it can be added to the credit according to the detection of the medal. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the credit addition after the replay winning has occurred from being performed prior to the betting number setting. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player after the replay winning has occurred without causing a sense of incongruity.

  Further, after winning the bell replay in the replay, a rip freeze occurs, and the process ends when one of a plurality of types of freeze release conditions including a condition established by inserting a medal is satisfied. As in the case of winning or losing a small role, this makes it seem that the next game will not start unless a predetermined operation such as insertion of medals is performed, and the next operation is performed by performing these predetermined operations. You can make it seem as if you can start the game.

Further, in this embodiment, when a bet amount is set according to an operation to the settlement switch 10, a bet amount adjustment process for adjusting the bet number is executed, and when a bet number is not set. Enables the credit settlement process to settle the credit, but if the set bet number is the bet number automatically bet by replay winning, the credit settlement process is executed without executing the bet number settlement process To do. As a result, the replay function itself of giving a replay game (1 game) instead of paying out medals is maintained and the significance of the existence of the replay is maintained. This makes it possible to further improve the convenience of the player after winning a replay. In addition, when a payment operation is performed during a lip freeze after winning a bell replay, credit payment is performed in the same manner, so that the convenience of the player can be improved.
In the present embodiment, the following problems can be solved. In the conventional slot machine, generally, the maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R until the rotation of the corresponding reels 2T, 2C, 2R is stopped is limited to a predetermined time (for example, 190 ms). Has been. For this reason, when providing a winning combination that does not miss out regardless of the operation timing, each winning combination is configured within a range that can be drawn in within a predetermined time in each reel (within 5 frames in this embodiment). It is necessary to arrange the pattern to be. As a result, the greater the number of winning combinations that do not miss, the more types of dedicated symbols that make up each winning combination.

  On the other hand, symbols as identification information drawn on a plurality of (usually three) reels cannot be provided indefinitely, and some restrictions are imposed. For example, the number of symbols drawn on each of the three reels is limited to a maximum of 21 per reel, and the number of symbols drawn on the three reels is limited to a maximum of 10 types in total.

  In the case of such a conventional slot machine as a background, for example, when trying to configure the winning combination with the same symbol, it is necessary to prepare a dedicated symbol. For this reason, there is a possibility that it may be difficult to design a dedicated symbol for a transitional role within the limits of the number and types of symbols. Further, when the replay can be won regardless of the operation procedure (push order, operation timing, etc.) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the replay is configured within a range that can be drawn in within a predetermined time. There is a need to arrange dedicated symbols, and it is necessary to increase the number of dedicated symbols, and there is a possibility that the design becomes more difficult.

  In order to solve such a problem, in the present embodiment, in the replay, a “replay-replay-replay” composed only of symbols having the same outer shape is stopped by the winning line LN. A replay and a second replay including a pattern whose outer shape is not the same or similar were included. As a result, it is not always necessary to provide multiple dedicated symbols for replay, and it is possible to avoid increasing the number and types of symbols, and within the limits on the number, types, and arrangement of symbols, ) Can be abundant. On the other hand, when the second replay winning is generated, the combination including the symbols whose outer shapes are not the same or similar is stopped, so that the replay winning is noticed more than when the first replay winning is generated. However, since it is possible to add credits according to the detected medals as described above, the player is inconvenienced that the inserted medals cannot be accepted. The game can be advanced without making it feel.

  In the present embodiment, the symbols constituting the second replay include symbols different from the replay. For this reason, there is a higher possibility that a medal will be inserted without noticing the occurrence of the second replay winning, but since the credit can be added according to the detected medal, the inserted medal is accepted. It is possible to advance the game without causing the player to feel troublesome. Further, when winning the bell replay, the bells are aligned on the invalid line LM5 that rises to the right. For this reason, it is possible to make the player think that a small role has been won, so that a medal can be inserted or a MAXBET operation can be performed, and it seems as if the next game can be started by the insertion or operation. It can be made to not feel uncomfortable.

  In the present embodiment, since the BET command (with BET sound) is set and output after the first replay winning is generated, the BET sound is output by the sub-control unit 91 side, while the second Since the BET command (no BET sound) is set and output after the replay winning of is generated, the BET sound is not output by the sub-control unit 91 side. This further increases the possibility of inserting a medal without noticing that the second replay winning has occurred and the betting number setting has been completed. Therefore, it is possible to advance the game without making the player feel annoyance that the inserted medal is not accepted.

  Further, in this embodiment, even when a second replay winning that does not output a BET sound has occurred and the betting number setting has been completed and a medal is inserted and credits are added, the upper limit of the betting number Since the same sound as the BET sound is output up to 3 times corresponding to the number, the BET sound is not output even though the player is willing to insert a medal and set the number of bets. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a feeling of distrust and discomfort.

  In this embodiment, the example in which the timing at which insertion (credit) / settlement is allowed after the replay winning is the completion of the automatic BET by the replay winning is described, but not limited to this, the insertion after the replay winning is performed. The timing at which (credit) / settlement is allowed may be when an automatic BET by replay winning is started (or started).

  FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the timing at which the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after winning the replay. FIG. 41 (a) shows that when the normal replay (middle stage replay, right-up replay) has been won, the game is finished without paying out, and then the processing of S6 in FIG. After the processing of S1 for S1 and the processing of S10 to S13 in FIG. 36 are performed, automatic BET processing (S14, S15) is started. That is, after the processing of S10 to S13 in FIG. 36 is performed, the start of the automatic BET processing (S14, S15) is confirmed, so it can be said that the automatic BET processing is started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), when automatic BET processing is started (or started), medals may be allowed to be inserted or settled.

  As a first example, for example, when YES is determined in S12 of FIG. 36 and the processing of S13 is ended, the same processing as S19 is performed to determine whether the value of the credit counter is 50 or not. After that, the automatic BET processing (the same processing as S14 and S15) is started, and after it is determined that the credit counter value is not 50, the automatic BET processing started thereafter is Without waiting for completion, credit is added when a medal inserted after the same processing as in S21 is detected, and credit is settled when an operation to the settlement switch 10 is detected. good. On the other hand, after performing the same process as S19 and determining that the value of the credit counter is 50, the same process as the process after S20 may be performed. In the first example, the rip freeze process may be performed, for example, at the timing when the betting number setting is started.

  As a second example, for example, an interrupt process for performing medal insertion or settlement can be executed, and when it is determined that the value of the credit counter in the first example is not 50, or the value of the credit counter is After it is determined that it is not 50, the interrupt process is permitted to be interrupted every predetermined period (2 msec) between the time when the process corresponding to S14 in FIG. The interrupt process may be executed at the same time, and when the automatic BET process is started (or started), the insertion or settlement of medals may be permitted.

  Even in such a case, even if a medal is inserted after the replay winning is generated and before the replay game is started (reel rotation start), the number of bets due to the replay winning In the case of medals detected after the setting (automatic BET) is started, credits can be added according to the detection of the medals. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the credit addition after the replay winning has occurred from being performed prior to the start of the betting number setting. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player after the replay winning has occurred without causing a sense of incongruity. In addition, the replay function of giving a replay game (one game) instead of paying out medals is maintained and the significance of replay is maintained. By making the payout possible, it is possible to further improve the convenience of the player after winning the replay.

  FIG. 41 (b) is a diagram for explaining the timing when the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after the Bell Replay wins. If the bell replay is won, the game is finished without paying out, and then the process of S6 in FIG. 35, the process of S1 for the next game, and the processes of S10 to S12 in FIG. 39 is performed, the rip freeze process shown in FIG. 39 is executed, and the rip freeze is controlled until the rip freeze release condition is satisfied. During this time, as shown in S87 of FIG. 39, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on to permit insertion of a medal for releasing the freeze, and a credit settlement operation and a MAXBET operation for releasing the freeze. Is also allowed. When the rip-freeze release condition is satisfied, the bet number setting is started, and the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed as shown in FIG.

  As described above, when the normal replay is won, as shown in FIG. 41A, when the automatic BET process is started (or started), the insertion or settlement of medals is permitted. When the bell replay wins, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), a bell lip freeze is generated, and after the freeze release condition is satisfied, the automatic BET process is started (or started). The medal insertion or settlement may be allowed. In this case, in order to avoid the simultaneous notification of the bet and the notification that the credit has been added, when an automatic bet process is started (or started), a medal is inserted or Although the settlement is allowed, the notification that the credit is added by the insertion of the medal may be always performed after the notification that the automatic bet is made. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the notification that the credit is added by the medal inserted to release the rip-freeze may be performed after the notification that the automatic bet is made. .

  Note that even when the timing at which the insertion (credit) is allowed after the replay winning is made when the automatic bet by the replay winning is started, the timing at which the settlement is allowed after the replay winning is automatically performed by the replay winning. You may make it be at the time of completion of BET.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 40C and 40D and FIGS. 41A and 41B, the timing at which insertion (credit) / settlement is allowed after the replay winning is obtained. Although an example in which an automatic BET is started or completed by a replay winning has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be a timing at which a predetermined condition is satisfied after the start or completion of an automatic BET by a replay winning. The predetermined condition may be satisfied when a predetermined time elapses or may be satisfied when a predetermined process ends. As an example in which the predetermined condition is satisfied after a predetermined time has elapsed after completion of the automatic BET by the replay winning, for example, the BET command (with BET sound) set in S17 of FIG. When the average time required to complete the third BET sound output based on the command is time A, the predetermined condition is established when time A has elapsed since YES is determined in S15. Further, when the average time required for the BET command (no BET sound) set in S18 of FIG. 36 to be output to the sub-control unit 91 and received is time B, The predetermined condition may be satisfied when time B elapses after YES is determined in S15. After the determination in S15 is YES, it may be possible to shift to S21 when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Further, in this embodiment, as the type of replay, the first replay normal replay (middle stage replay, right-up replay) as the specific replay display result that is a specific combination and the nonspecific replay display result that is a nonspecific combination However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the replay type is not provided with the non-specific replay display result but only the specific replay display result. In contrast to this, the specific regame display result may not be provided, and only the non-specific regame display result may be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example is described in which the insertion after the replay winning is allowed regardless of the type of the replay. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the insertion after the replay winning is allowed according to the type of the replay. You may comprise. For example, after the first replay winning as the specific replay display result that is the specific combination, the insertion is not allowed, but only after the second replay winning as the nonspecific replay display result that is the nonspecific combination. Input may be allowed. In other words, it may be possible to improve the convenience without bothering the player by making the insertion permitted only when it is difficult to notice that the re-game display result has been derived.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the settlement after the replay winning is allowed regardless of the type of the replay has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the settlement after the replay winning is permitted according to the type of the replay. You may comprise. For example, after the first replay winning as a specific replay display result as a specific combination is not allowed to be settled, but only after the second replay winning as a nonspecific replay display result as a nonspecific combination Payment may be allowed. In other words, the payment may be allowed only when it is difficult to notice that the re-game display result has been derived, and the convenience may be improved without bothering the player.

In addition, although the example of generating the rip freeze after executing the belle lip play and before the automatic betting has been described has been described, the rip freeze occurs at the end of the game where the belle rip play is won. Alternatively, it may be one that starts to be generated (for example, execution of a rip freeze process in the winning determination process of S4 in FIG. 35).
Rip freeze is generated or started after an automatic bet after winning the bell replay (for example, after determining YES in S12 of FIG. 36, first, the processing of S14 to S16 is performed, and then In addition, after the processes of S17 to S18 are performed, the freeze freeze process may be performed). In this case, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), during the rip freeze after the betting number setting is completed, as shown in S87 of FIG. 39, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on to release the freeze. 36 is permitted, and a credit settlement operation and a MAXBET operation for releasing the freeze are permitted. After the rip-freeze release condition is satisfied, it is determined in S19 in FIG. 36 that the credit is possible. In step S21 and subsequent steps, medals may be inserted or settled as shown in FIG. 41 (c). Also in this case, the timing at which the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed is not limited to after the automatic BET processing is performed and the betting number setting is completed, and the automatic BET processing is started (or started). May be).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the elapse of a predetermined time, the MAXBET operation, the medal insertion (detection by a specific sensor), and the credit checkout operation are set as conditions for canceling the rip freeze. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other conditions may be used.

  For example, when a small role such as one bell wins, if the player normally performs an operation to start the next game, the operation may be set as a freeze release condition. For example, if there is a button that prompts the player to operate when a small role such as one bell wins, the operation of the button may be set as a freeze release condition.

  Further, the rip freeze may be canceled by any one of the elapse of a predetermined time, the MAXBET operation, the medal insertion, and the credit settlement operation. For example, the freeze release condition may be satisfied only by inserting medals. Further, when all of the plurality of conditions are satisfied, or when any two or more conditions among the plurality of conditions are satisfied, the rip freeze may be canceled. Further, it may not be set that the rip freeze is canceled after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the player wins a bell replay, Rip Freeze is executed as a method for prompting the player to perform a MAXBET operation, a medal insertion, or a credit settlement operation. However, the present invention is not limited to freezing. For example, when a player wins a bell replay, an image prompting a MAXBET operation, a medal insertion, or a credit checkout operation may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in the same manner as when winning a normal bell. The speaker 53 or 54 may output a sound prompting a MAXBET operation, a medal insertion, or a credit settlement operation.

  Whether or not the freeze release condition due to the medal insertion is satisfied is determined based on the detection result of the specific sensor (appropriate detection result) among the plurality of sensors included in the insertion medal sensor 31 for detecting the medal inserted in the normal time. The example in which all of the plurality of sensors are provided on the downstream side of the flow path switching solenoid 30 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may provide in the medal insertion part 4 side (upstream side) from the path switching solenoid 30.

Further, whether or not the freeze release condition by inserting a medal is satisfied is determined based on detection results (whether or not an appropriate detection result is obtained) of all the centers included in the inserted medal sensor 31. Also good. Whether or not the freeze release condition due to medal insertion is satisfied is determined by a sensor different from the insertion medal sensor 31 used for determination of the number of bets and credit addition (a sensor not related to the setting of the insertion medal flag (hereinafter referred to as a special sensor). May also be determined based on the detection result of the special sensor. For example, as a special sensor, a freeze release sensor A that detects a medal is provided downstream of the flow path switching solenoid 30, and in a normal time, medal insertion is not detected only by the detection result of the freeze release sensor A, During the rip freeze, it may be detected based on the detection result of the freeze release sensor A that the freeze release condition is satisfied by inserting a medal. Further, as a special sensor, a freeze release sensor A for detecting a medal is provided on the medal insertion part 4 side (upstream side) from the flow path switching solenoid 30, and in normal times, depending on only the detection result of the freeze release sensor A. While the medal insertion is not detected, it may be detected that the freeze release condition is satisfied by the medal insertion based on the detection result of the freeze release sensor A during the rip freeze. In this case, the freeze release condition can be established by inserting medals even during a rip freeze that occurs when the value of the credit counter is 50.
In the present embodiment, the example in which the symbol combination of the first replay is composed only of the same symbol (“replay”) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one symbol and the one symbol are combined. You may comprise so that an external shape may be comprised from a similar pattern. Symbols with similar outer shapes refer to symbols that share the same aesthetics (impressions) caused by the visual perception of the player who is the consumer, and as a result are the same symbols conceptually. A design that can be recognized (it is difficult to recognize as a different design). For example, if one symbol is a symbol with the shape of “REPLAY” surrounded by an ellipse, the character “REPLAY” is underlined and the symbol with the shape surrounded by the ellipse is one. It can be said that the design is similar in shape to the design.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol combination of the second replay is composed of the same symbol (“replay”) as the symbol of the first replay and a different symbol whose outer shape is not the same or similar. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may include a symbol similar to the symbol of the first replay, or only a different symbol that is not the same as or similar to the symbol of the first replay. It may be. In this case, the different symbol may be a symbol that is not included in any of the winning symbol combinations other than the replay, may be a symbol included in the winning symbol combination other than the replay, and The symbols included in the winning symbol combinations other than the replay (for example, “Bell”, for example, “Watermelon A”) may be stopped on the invalid line.

  Further, in this embodiment, when winning the bell replay, a symbol combination corresponding to the winning bell replay is displayed on the winning line LN, and a symbol combination such as a middle bell and one bell is displayed on the invalid line LM5. A certain “bell-bell-bell” was displayed. However, other combinations, symbol combinations, and display positions may be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, regarding the settlement process, when the settlement switch 10 is operated in the state where the bet number is set by inserting a medal or by operating the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6, FIG. In step S56, NO is determined, and the betting number settlement process is performed in step S57. Thereafter, when the settlement switch 10 is operated again, YES is determined in step S56 in FIG. 37 and the credit settlement process is performed in step S59. An example was described in which the betting amount was settled by the above settlement operation and the credit settlement was performed by the next settlement operation. However, the checkout process is not limited to such a pattern, but may be performed in the following pattern.

  Pattern a: Credit settlement may be performed in the first settlement operation, and bet number settlement may be performed in the next settlement operation. For example, in S56, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0. When it is determined that the value of the credit counter is not 0, the process proceeds to S59 to perform credit settlement, and the value of the credit counter is 0. When it is determined, the process may proceed to S57 to perform the betting number settlement.

  Pattern b: The bet amount may be settled by adding the credit for the bet amount in the first settlement operation, and the credit settlement may be performed in the next settlement operation. For example, if the set bet number is 3 and the credit is 40, the bet amount is settled by adding 3 credits for the bet number in the first settlement operation and setting the credit to 43, and the next settlement operation The credit may be settled by paying out 43 medals. In this case, there is a case where the value of the credit counter exceeds 50 due to the betting amount adjustment by the first adjustment operation. In this case, the value of the credit counter may be set to a value exceeding 50, or medals for the amount exceeding 50 may be paid out at the time of the betting amount adjustment.

  Pattern c: The bet amount may be settled by one settlement operation, and then credit settlement may be performed subsequently. For example, when it is determined NO in S56, credit settlement may be performed subsequently after the betting number settlement is performed, and when it is determined YES in S56, credit settlement may be performed.

  Pattern d: It is also possible to perform a credit settlement first by a single settlement operation and subsequently perform a betting number settlement. For example, in S56, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0. When it is determined that the value of the credit counter is not 0, the bet amount adjustment is performed after the credit settlement, and the credit counter value is When it is determined that the number is 0, the betting amount may be settled.

  Pattern e: The bet amount may be settled by adding credits for the bet amount in one settlement operation, and then credit settlement may be performed subsequently. For example, when the set bet number is 3 and the credit is 40, the settlement operation is performed, so that the bet amount settlement is performed by adding 3 credits for the bet number and setting the credit to 43. Subsequent to the above, credit settlement may be performed by paying out 43 medals. In this case, there is a case where the value of the credit counter exceeds 50 due to the betting amount adjustment by the adjustment operation. In this case, the value of the credit counter may be set to a value exceeding 50, or medals for the amount exceeding 50 may be paid out at the time of the betting amount adjustment.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which a BET sound is output when an automatic BET is made after the first replay winning, and a BET sound is not output when an automatic BET is placed after the second replay winning. However, regardless of the type of replay that has been won, a BET sound may not be output when an automatic BET is placed, and a BET sound may be output when an automatic BET is placed.

  In this embodiment, the example in which the presence / absence of a BET sound is discriminated by the type of the BET command has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be determined whether or not there is.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example of performing processing of sequentially turning on the 1BETLED14, the 2BETLED15, and the 3BETLED16 according to the value of the BET counter after the value of the BET counter is added regardless of the type of replay that has won a prize. As described above, the present invention is not limited to this. After the automatic BET is made after the first replay winning, the 1BETLED14, 2BETLED15, and 3BETLED16 are sequentially turned on, and after the second replay winning is automatically betted, May not perform the processing.

  In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which when a medal is inserted after the second replay winning, a credit command (with a BET sound) is output in S39 and a BET sound is output, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, the BET sound may be output regardless of the type of replay that has won the prize. For example, in S36, it may be determined whether or not a replay prize has been won.

  Further, in this embodiment, an example in which a BET sound is output up to a specified number when credits are added after a replay winning is described. However, the present invention is not limited to the case where credits are added. For example, the MAXBET switch 6 is operated. In this case, the BET sound may be output up to a specified number of minutes according to the operation.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the configuration of the reel motors 32C, 32R, 32T mounted in the slot machine of the present embodiment. The reel motors 32C, 32R, and 32T are hybrid type stepping motors, and include a stator 32b and a rotor 32a facing the stator 32b. The rotor 32a has a large number of gear-shaped salient poles (not shown), and permanent magnets magnetized in the same direction as the rotation shaft are incorporated therein.

  The main control unit 41 performs a process of updating the excitation states of the respective excitation phases φ1 to φ4 of the reel motors 32T, 32C, and 32R in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and from the motor drive circuit 45 according to the process. A phase signal is output. Reel motors 32T, 32C, and 32R receive this phase signal, and each excitation phase φ1 to φ4 of stator 32b is excited according to a predetermined procedure, so that each time one pulse is received, a predetermined angle (1 step = The rotor 32a rotates about 1.07 (360/336) degrees.

  FIG. 50 is a timing chart at the time of reel acceleration at the time of starting the reel motors 32C, 32R, 32T.

  One step is a unit to which one excitation pattern is applied. During constant speed rotation, the rotor 32a rotates by the predetermined angle (about 1.07 (360/336) degrees) described above for each step. Therefore, in the stepping motor of this embodiment, the reel makes one round with a cycle of 336 steps as described above, and since 21 symbols are arranged on the reel, 1 is made every 16 steps. The symbol will move. The excitation pattern is updated by timer interrupt processing (main) performed by the main control unit 41.

  The count is the number of times the timer interrupt process (main) is executed until the next excitation pattern update, (count number) × 0.56 ms (time interval at which the timer interrupt process (main) is executed) ) Is an excitation time (step rate) in which the excitation pattern of the step continues. The number of steps indicates the number of times that the corresponding excitation time is continuously applied. Also, φ1 to φ4 in FIG. 50 indicate the respective excitation phases, “ON” indicates the excited state, and “OFF” indicates the demagnetized state.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the main control unit 41 starts rotating the reel motors 32C, 32R, and 32T in the rotational direction by the 1-2 phase excitation method described later from the state in which the excitation phases φ1 to φ4 are demagnetized. Start excitation. Specifically, (φ1, φ4) is excited in the first step, and (φ4), (φ4, φ3), (φ3), (φ3, φ2), (φ2), (φ2, In the order of φ1), (φ1)..., the excitation pattern is updated alternately for φ1-φ4 in two phases, one phase, and two phases.

  Further, the step rate of each step is shortened so as to gradually approach the step rate (2.24 ms) of constant speed rotation. At this time, instead of reducing the step rate uniformly, the reel is smoothly accelerated by interlacing a long step rate and a short step rate and gradually increasing the short step rate. .

  After shifting to the constant speed state, the reel motors 32C, 32R, 32T are driven by updating the excitation pattern of the 1-2 phase excitation method at a step rate of 2.24 ms to rotate the reels 2C, 2R, 2T. Let Specifically, along the rotation direction of the rotor 32a, (φ1, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ3), (φ3), (φ3, φ2), (φ2), (φ2, φ1), (φ1 ), (Φ1, φ4)... And the excitation pattern of φ1 to φ4 is alternately updated every two phases, one phase, two phases, one phase, two phases, and the rotor 32a is rotated. Thus, the reels 2C, 2R, and 2T are rotated.

  When the reel stop control is performed, as shown in FIG. 51, after a stop condition such as a stop operation is established, until the brake start position corresponding to the stop position is reached, the step rate (2. 24 ms), and when the brake start position is reached, a step rate (3.36 ms) longer than the step rate (2.24 ms) during constant speed rotation is applied, and the brake is applied to decelerate the rotor 32a. In the next step (step before 4 steps), all-phase excitation for exciting all the excitation phases φ1 to φ4 is started. As a result, sudden braking is applied to the rotor 32a, and as a result of overshoot (step out), the rotor 32a stops at the stop position.

  In this embodiment, after all-phase excitation is performed in the stop control, it slips by overshooting for 5 steps. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51, the brake is applied at a step 6 steps before the stop position in the rotation direction. All phase excitation is started 5 steps before the stop position.

  As described above, in this embodiment, by changing the output state of the phase signal, the excitation states of the respective excitation phases φ1 to φ4 are changed, whereby the reel motors 32C, 32R, and 32T are driven. As a result, the reel can be rotated and stopped. That is, the reel is operated by changing the output state of the phase signal, and the reel is stopped by not changing the output state of the phase signal.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not to control a freeze state that delays the progress of the game for a predetermined period when the weak cherry and the strong cherry are won, and the freeze state. In the case of the control, the start game in the freeze state, the type of the freeze state fails (finished in the first stage described later), the continuation rate 50% (the second stage continuation rate 50% described later), the continuation rate 80 Freeze lottery to determine either% A (second stage continuation rate 80% A described later) or continuation rate 80% B (second stage continuation rate 80% B described later) and the result of the freeze lottery Is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  When it is determined that there is no freeze, the main control unit 41 does not control the freeze state, and the stop operation of the corresponding game reel by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed when the reel is rotated at a constant speed. Enable.

  On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 wins the freeze lottery, that is, when it is determined to control to the freeze state, the main control unit 41 waits until the start game determined at the same time, and starts the start operation of the freeze state (start switch 7 (Start SW in the figure)) At the same time, control of the freeze state is started. In the freeze state, the timing at which the reel stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is validated for a predetermined period is delayed, and a freeze start command indicating the start of the freeze state is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the freeze state by the main control unit 41 includes a first stage, a second stage, and an end stage.

  In the first stage, after the freeze start game is started, a freeze start command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 and the middle reel and the right reel are rotated so that the middle reel and the right reel are rotated at a constant speed. After that, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R can be accepted as an operation not related to the progress of the game. When the stop switches 8C and 8R are operated, the symbols corresponding to the result of the freeze lottery are stopped on the middle reel and the right reel corresponding to the operated stop switch. At this time, after the target stop position is derived without completely stopping the reel, the control for vibrating the reel to the upper limit is performed for a certain period of time (see FIGS. 43B and 44B). Whether the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated before 10 seconds have elapsed after the start operation (before the number of times the timer interrupt process (main) has been executed exceeds 10 seconds), When 10 seconds elapse before the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated (when the number of times the timer interrupt process (main) is executed exceeds 10 seconds), the first step is performed. A first stage progress command that can specify that the result is to be derived by being advanced is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and control is performed according to the result of the freeze lottery (misaligned, red 7 aligned, blue 7 aligned).

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 receives the freeze start command to rotate the left reel and, as shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 44 (a), displays the message Ma1 “Push from right!”. Displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to execute a right push operation instruction for prompting the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the order of right, middle, and left, and for the effects built in the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R The stop LEDs 57L, 57C, and 57R are turned on to prompt the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  The stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R when the stop LEDs 57L, 57C, 57R for production are lit, and the stop switches 8L, when the left / middle / right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R are lit, The lighting mode is different from the lighting mode of 8C and 8R (for example, brightness, color, one is on and the other is flashing, etc.), and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is related to the progress of the game. It can be distinguished from the case where it can be accepted as. Further, in this embodiment, when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R can be accepted as an operation not related to the progress of the game in the frozen state, the stop for the performance built in the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R By turning on the LEDs 57L, 57C, and 57R, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is urged. However, the stop LEDs 57L, 57C, and 57R for production are not provided with the production stop LEDs 57L, 57C, and 57R. Although provided, the stop LEDs 57L, 57C, and 57R for presentation may not be turned on when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R can be accepted as an operation that does not participate in the progress of the game in the frozen state.

  And the sub-control part 91 stops the symbol according to the result of the freeze lottery on the left reel by receiving the first stage progress command. At this time, unlike the middle reel and the right reel, the control to vibrate the reel to the upper limit is not performed and the left reel is stopped. Then, as shown in FIGS. 43 (c) and 43 (d) and FIGS. 44 (c) and 44 (d), the first stage result notification effect for notifying the result of the first stage specified from the freeze lottery result command is executed. To do.

  The control according to the result of the first stage is control according to the type of freeze state determined in the freeze lottery that determined the freeze state, specifically, failure (unevenness), continuation rate 50%, The control is based on the continuation rate 80% A and the continuation rate 80% B.

  When the type of freeze state is failure, as shown in FIG. 43B, the main control unit 41 changes the reels 2C and 2R, and then operates the stop switches 8C and 8R to operate the right reel. Although “Red 7” is tempered in the middle stage of the middle reel, the sub-control unit 91 does not stop “Red 7” in the middle stage where “Red 7” is tempered by operating the stop switch 8L. To do. After that, the main control unit 41 finishes the freeze state without going to the second stage after a lapse of time that can recognize the first stage result notification effect, and can specify the end of the freeze state. Is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Thereafter, the reels 2C, 2R, and 2T are started to fluctuate so that the positional relationship between the reels 2C, 2R, and 2T is random, and then the reels are operated at a constant speed, whereby the stop operation of the reels by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed. Enable it.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 43 (c), the sub-control unit 91 displays a message Ma 2 of “Sorry…” on the liquid crystal display 51 to notify that the first step has failed and notify the first step result. Perform the production. Thereafter, by receiving a freeze end command, the fluctuation of the left reel is started.

  In this embodiment, after the freeze state is finished, the middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel start to change so that the positional relationship among the middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel becomes random. The positional relationship between the previous middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel may be stored, and after the freeze ends, the positional relationship may be returned to the middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel before the freeze starts. Further, the position relationship between the middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel may be random, or the freeze state may be terminated after the position relationship between the middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel is returned to the position relationship before the start of the freeze. .

  When the freeze state type is the continuation rate 50% or the continuation rate 80% A, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), the main control unit 41 fluctuates the reels 2C and 2R, and then stops the stop switch 8C, When 8R is operated, “Red 7” is tempered in the middle of the right reel and middle reel, or “Red 7” is placed in the lower stage of the right reel and middle reel, and “Blue 7” is raised to the right of the right reel and middle reel. The sub-control unit 91 aligns the combinations of “red 7-red 7-red 7” in the lower stage where “red 7” is tempered by operating the stop switch 8L. Thereafter, the main control unit 41 proceeds to the second stage after a lapse of time that can recognize the first stage result notification effect.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 43 (c), the sub-control unit 91 displays a message Ma 3 of “Success!” On the liquid crystal display 51 to notify that the first step has been successful, and notify the first step result. Perform the production.

  When the type of freeze state is 80% B, as shown in FIG. 44B, the main control unit 41 operates the stop switches 8C and 8R after changing the reels 2C and 2R. Then, “Red 7” is tempered in the middle of the right and middle reels, or “Red 7” is tempered in the lower part of the right and middle reels, and “Blue 7” is tempered to the right of the right and middle reels. The sub-control unit 91 aligns the combinations of “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” in the lower stage where “blue 7” is tempered by operating the stop switch 8L. Thereafter, the main control unit 41 proceeds to the second stage after a lapse of time that can recognize the first stage result notification effect.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 44 (d), the sub-control unit 91 displays a message Ma5 of “Success!” On the liquid crystal display 51 to notify that the first step has been successful. The notification effect is executed.

  Further, as described later, it is determined whether or not the second stage is continued according to the continuation rate determined as the freeze type, that is, whether or not the navigation stock lottery in which one or more navigation stocks are won is repeatedly performed. Therefore, it can be expected that the subsequent second stage is more likely to continue repeatedly than when the blue 7-alignment is derived and the red 7-alignment is derived. In addition, even when the continuation rate is 50%, when the continuation rate is 80% A, the red 7 alignment is derived. Therefore, even when the red 7 alignment is derived, the subsequent second stage has a higher continuation rate. There is no denying the possibility of continuing repeatedly.

  In the second stage, a second stage start command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and the middle reel and the right reel are once changed to stop at the preparation output (the stop mode in FIG. 45 (a)). Is sent to the sub-control unit 91, and the start switch 7 (start SW in the figure) is transmitted regardless of the elapsed time. Wait until it is operated, and by operating the start switch 7, a continuous lottery is performed to determine whether or not to continue the second stage (failure, continuation A, continuation B), and the second stage is advanced. Then, a second stage progress command that can specify that the result corresponding to the continuous lottery is derived is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In the continuation lottery, if the type determined in the freeze lottery that triggered the freeze state is a continuation rate of 50%, the continuation (continuation A, continuation B) is determined with a probability of 50%, and with a probability of 50%. If it is determined that there is no continuation (failure), and the type determined in the freeze lottery is continuation rate 80% A, 80% B, continuation is determined with a probability of 80% (continuation A, continuation B) and 20% Determine no continuation (failure) with probability. Then, after the continuous lottery, control according to the result of the second stage is performed.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 receives the second stage start command, temporarily changes the left reel and stops it at the preparation output (the stop mode in FIG. 45A), and the preparation output stops and the first operation stops. Control is performed so that the two stages can proceed. Then, by receiving the ready-out stop command, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), the message Ma6 “Strike the lever!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 and the start switch 7 is prompted to operate. A switch operation instruction effect is executed.

  The control according to the result of the second stage is control according to the determination result of the continuous lottery, specifically, control according to continuation A, continuation B, and failure.

  When the determination result of the continuous lottery is “Continuation A”, as shown in FIG. 45B, the main control unit 41 changes the middle reel and the right reel and finally “red 7-red 7-red 7”. The sub-control unit 91 also changes the left reel so that the combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” is finally aligned to the lower right. A possible stop mode is derived. As a result, the combinations of “red 7-red 7-red 7” are aligned to the lower right, and it is notified that the number of navigation stocks is added and that the second stage is continued. After that, the main control unit 41 once transmits a middle reel, second stage start command to the sub control unit 91, changes the right reel, stops again at the preparation output, and waits until the start switch 7 is operated. The second stage is continued by returning to the state to be performed.

  At this time, the sub-control unit 91 receives a second-stage result command, that is, the timing at which one or more navigation stocks are determined with a probability corresponding to the red 7 alignment at the timing when the red 7 alignment is derived. Stock lottery is performed, and the number of selected navigation stocks is added to the number of navigation stocks stored in the RAM 91c. As shown in FIG. 45 (b), for example, a message “Yeah! By displaying the Ma7 on the liquid crystal display 51, the navigation stock number addition notification effect for notifying the added navigation stock number is executed, and then, as shown in FIG. 45 (d), the second stage is continued. In other words, for example, a continuous effect that informs that there is a possibility that the number of navigation stocks may be further added is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, for example, the message Ma9 of “one more time!” Run, then, by receiving the preparation outcome stop command, to execute the start switch operation instructions directing again.

  When the determination result of the continuous lottery is “continuation B”, as shown in FIG. 45C, the main control unit 41 changes the middle reel and the right reel and finally “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7”. ”Is derived so that the combination of“ blue 7-blue 7-blue 7 ”is finally aligned to the lower right by changing the left reel. A possible stop mode is derived. As a result, the combinations of “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” are aligned to the right, and it is notified that the number of navigation stocks is added and that the second stage is continued. After that, the main control unit 41 once transmits a middle reel, second stage start command to the sub control unit 91, changes the right reel, stops again at the preparation output, and waits until the start switch 7 is operated. The second stage is continued by returning to the state to be performed.

  At this time, the sub-control unit 91 determines the number of navigation stocks that is one or more at a probability corresponding to the blue 7 alignment when the second stage result command is received, that is, at the timing when the blue 7 alignment is derived. A stock lottery is performed, and the number of selected navigation stocks is added to the number of navigation stocks stored in the RAM 91c, and as shown in FIG. 45. After that, as shown in FIG. 45 (d), the second stage is continued, that is, the continuation effect that notifies that there is a possibility that the number of navigation stocks may be added is executed. The start switch operation instruction effect is executed again by receiving the preparation-out stop command. Further, the probability corresponding to the blue 7 set applied to the navigation stock lottery is a probability set so that the average value of the number of navigation stocks determined is higher than the probability corresponding to the red 7 set. When the alignment is derived, more navigation stock numbers can be expected than when the red 7 alignment is derived.

  If the result of the continuous lottery is unsuccessful, as shown in FIG. 45 (e), the main control unit 41 ends the second stage without operating the middle reel and the right reel, and proceeds to the end stage. Further, the sub-control unit 91 does not operate the left reel.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 45 (e), the sub-control unit 91 displays a message Ma 10 of “Sorry…” on the liquid crystal display 51 to notify that the second step has failed, and notifies the second step result. Perform the production.

  In the end stage, the start switch 7 is operated before 10 seconds have elapsed after the transition to the end stage (before the number of times the timer interrupt process (main) has been executed exceeds 10 seconds), After the transition to the end stage, when 10 seconds have passed before the start switch 7 is operated (when the number of times the timer interrupt process (main) has been executed exceeds 10 seconds), the freeze state is set. After that, a freeze end command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. After that, the middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel are started to change so that the positional relationship among the middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel is random. Reel stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is validated by the high speed rotation.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 45 (f), the sub control unit 91 displays the total number Ma11 of the navigation stock added in the second stage on the liquid crystal display 51 and “operate the lever”. A message Ma12 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and an end notification effect that prompts the user to operate the start switch 7 in order to end the freeze state is executed until a freeze end command is received.

  In this embodiment, after the freeze state is finished, the middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel start to change so that the positional relationship among the middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel becomes random. The positional relationship between the previous middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel may be stored, and after the freeze ends, the positional relationship may be returned to the middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel before the freeze starts. Further, the position relationship between the middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel may be random, or the freeze state may be terminated after the position relationship between the middle reel, the right reel, and the specific reel is returned to the position relationship before the start of the freeze. .

  Next, the phase signal change status of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and 32T that drive the left, middle, and right reels 2L, 2C, and 2R when the freeze is performed, and the left, middle, and right reel stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R The lighting / extinguishing situation and the lighting / extinguishing situations of the production stop LEDs 57L, 57C, 57R will be described.

  First, when the game is not controlled in the frozen state, as shown in FIG. 46, after the game is started in accordance with the operation of the start switch 7, the left reel as an effect reel, the middle reel as a game reel, the right reel, and a specific reel As the rotation starts, the phase signals of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and 32T change. After that, when the gaming reel is rotated at a constant speed, the stop operation is enabled, and the left / middle / right stop enable LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R are lit.

  By performing a stop operation with the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in a state in which the stop operation is enabled, the main control unit 41 performs control to stop the corresponding game reel. At this time, when the stop switch 8L is operated, the main control unit 41 controls to stop the corresponding specific reel, and the sub control unit 91 also performs control to stop the left reel as the production reel. After the specific reel is stopped, all the excitation phases of the reel motor are turned off and the phase signal does not change, and this state continues for at least about 500 ms (period in which the timer interrupt process is executed 224 times). The The period of about 500 ms is longer than the time from the start of all-phase excitation by the reel stop control until the reel is completely stopped, and further the time when all-phase excitation is performed when the reel is stopped. This is a long time, enough time for the reel to be completely stationary, and sufficient for the player to recognize that the reel is stopped.

  Next, when the freeze state is determined, as shown in FIG. 47, after the game is started in accordance with the operation of the start switch 7, the left reel, which is an effect reel, the middle reel, which is a game reel, and the right reel The phase signals of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R change with the start of rotation. After that, when all the reels are rotated at a constant speed, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R can be accepted as an operation not related to the progress of the game, and the effects incorporated in the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R The stop LEDs 57L, 57C, and 57R are turned on, and operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is prompted.

  When the stop switch 8L is operated in a state where the operations of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R can be accepted, the sub-control unit 91 performs control to stop the left reel. After the left reel stops, all the excitation phases of the reel motor are turned off, and the phase signal does not change, and this state continues for at least about 500 ms. On the other hand, when the stop switches 8C and 8R are operated, the main control unit 41 performs control to stop the middle reel and the right reel. In the middle reel and the right reel, the control of vibrating the reel up and down at the derived stop position is performed for a time of 500 ms or more. During this time, the phase signal of the reel motor continues to change.

  When the process moves to the second stage, the rotation of the left reel, which is the production reel, the middle reel, which is the game reel, and the right reel, is started and the preparations (the stop mode in FIG. 45 (a)) are stopped and started. Switch 7 is enabled. By operating the start switch 7 in this state, the main control unit 41 controls to change the middle reel and the right reel and to stop the reel in a stop mode according to the result of the second stage. After the middle reel and the right reel are stopped, all the excitation phases of the reel motor are turned off and the phase signal does not change, and this state continues for at least 500 ms. In addition, by operating the start switch 7, the sub-control unit 91 also performs control to change the left reel and stop in a stop mode according to the result of the second stage. After the gaming reel is stopped, all the excitation phases of the reel motor are turned off, and the phase signal does not change, and this state continues for at least 500 ms.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the stop switches 8C and 8R are operated in a state of being involved in the progress of the game and control is performed to stop the corresponding gaming reel, 500 ms or more after the gaming reel is stopped. While the phase signal of the reel motor of the gaming reel does not change over the period of time, and the game is completely stopped, the stop switches 8C and 8R that are not involved in the progress of the game in the freeze state are operated. When control for stopping the corresponding gaming reel is performed, that is, when control similar to that performed when the stop switches 8C and 8R are operated in a state of being involved in the progress of the game is performed, the middle reel and the right reel are Control is performed to output a phase signal so that it vibrates up and down even when stopped, and the phase signal changes until reel rotation starts again It has been continued so. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 48, when the gaming reel is stopped as a result of the game by the gaming reel stop operation, before the minimum period of 500 ms, in which the phase signal of the reel motor does not change, elapses. The phase signal always changes.

  For this reason, when the gaming reels are stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop switches 8C and 8R, the player can clearly recognize whether the gaming reels are stopped as a result of the game or as a production.

  Further, in this embodiment, when control is performed to stop the corresponding gaming reel by operating the stop switches 8C and 8R that are not involved in the progress of the game in the frozen state, the corresponding gaming reel is stopped. Even so, control is performed to output a phase signal so as to vibrate up and down, and a stop switch corresponding to the gaming reel is operated during rotation of the gaming reel, and the corresponding gaming reel is subjected to the game. When a stop mode that does not result is derived, the reel vibrates, so when the game reel is stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop switch, the player is informed whether the game was stopped as a result of the game or stopped as a production. Can be recognized more clearly.

  In this embodiment, when control is performed to stop the corresponding gaming reel by operating the stop switches 8C and 8R that are not involved in the progress of the game in the frozen state, the corresponding gaming reel is stopped. Even though the control is performed to output the phase signal so as to vibrate up and down, stop switches 8C and 8R that are not involved in the progress of the game are operated in the frozen state as shown in FIG. When the control for stopping the corresponding gaming reel is performed, the phase signal of the reel motor of the corresponding gaming reel is not changed after the corresponding gaming reel is stopped. 500 ms which is the minimum period during which the phase signal of the reel motor does not change when the gaming reel is stopped as a result of the game by the stop operation The phase signal may be changed before the lapse of time. Even in such a configuration, when the game reel is stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop switches 8C and 8R, is it stopped as a result of the game? It is possible to make the player clearly recognize whether or not the production has been stopped.

  In addition, when control is performed to stop the corresponding gaming reel by operating the stop switches 8C and 8R that are not involved in the progress of the game in the frozen state, even if the gaming reel is stopped, it slowly swings up and down. It can be configured to control the output of the phase signal so that it becomes an aspect, or it can be configured to control the output of the phase signal so that it can be recognized with a glance but cannot be recognized at a glance. good.

  Further, in this embodiment, when control is performed to stop the corresponding gaming reel by operating the stop switches 8C and 8R that are not involved in the progress of the game in the freeze state, the operation of the start switch 7 is thereafter performed. The game reel starts to rotate again without being accompanied, and the stop operation becomes effective when the game reel rotates at a constant speed. Therefore, when the game reel stops with the operation of the stop switch 8L, the game reel stops as a result of the game. It is possible to make the player more clearly recognize whether it has been performed or stopped as an effect.

  In this embodiment, when the stop switch 8L that is not involved in the progress of the game is operated in the freeze state and the control for stopping the corresponding effect reel is performed, the effect reel is stopped as a result of the game. Unlike the middle reel and the right reel, the reel signal for production does not change for more than 500 ms, because it is not necessary for the player to clearly recognize whether or not the production has been stopped. When the control for stopping the corresponding production reel is performed by operating the stop switch 8L not related to the progress of the game in the frozen state, the control reel is maintained. Control that outputs a phase signal so that it will vibrate up and down even if the production reel stops like the reel and right reel In other words, when the gaming reel is stopped as a result of the game by the stop operation of the gaming reel, the phase signal is always changed before 500 ms which is the minimum period in which the phase signal of the reel motor does not change. Well, with such a configuration, the operation mode of the effect reel in the frozen state is the same operation mode as the middle reel and the right reel among the game reels, so that the effect reel can be a game other than a specific reel. It can be recognized without distinction from the reel.

  In this embodiment, when the stop switches 8C and 8R that are not involved in the progress of the game in the freeze state are operated to stop the corresponding gaming reels, that is, the stop switches 8C and 8R When control similar to that performed when operating in a state involving progress is performed, control is performed to output a phase signal so as to vibrate up and down even if the middle reel and the right reel reel are stopped. The phase signal continues to change until the reel rotation starts again. That is, the phase signal always changes before 500 ms, which is the minimum period during which the phase signal of the reel motor does not change, elapses. On the other hand, when the start switch 7 that is not involved in the progress of the game in the freeze state is operated to stop the middle reel and the right reel, that is, the stop switches 8C and 8R are involved in the progress of the game. When control similar to that operated in the state is performed, when the gaming reel is stopped, the phase signal is not changed for 500 ms or more, and the gaming reel is kept stopped. ing.

  For this reason, when the gaming reel is stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop switches 8C and 8R, the player can clearly recognize whether it is stopped as a result of the game or as an effect. In a situation where it is clear whether the game is stopped as a result of the game or the production is stopped by the operation of the start switch 7, the reel of the reel derived as the production is stopped by stopping the gaming reel for 500 ms or more. The stop position can be surely recognized by the player.

  In this embodiment, the start switch 7 is applied as an operating means other than the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are controlled to stop the reel when operated in the freeze state. However, the MAXBET switch 6. The settlement switch 10 or the like may be applied.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the control is performed to stop the corresponding gaming reel by operating the stop switches 8C, 8R or the start switch 7 that are not involved in the progress of the game in the frozen state, the derived game The expected value of the number of navigation stocks to be added in the navigation stock lottery varies depending on the stop position of the reel for use. That is, since an advantage for the player is suggested according to the derived stop position of the gaming reel, attention can be paid to the stop state of the gaming reel derived by the player's operation in the frozen state. .

  Further, in this embodiment, in the freeze state, only the left reel, which is the effect reel, and the middle reel and the right reel of the gaming reels are operated, and the specific reel of the gaming reels is not operated. The specific reel can be recognized separately from the gaming reels other than the specific reel, and the effect reel can be recognized without being distinguished from the gaming reels other than the specific reel.

  In the freeze state, the specific reel may be operated in the same manner as other game reels. With such a configuration, the middle reel and the right reel can be used as a control of the game reel in the freeze state. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately control whether the reel is a specific reel or not, and the control load on the main control unit 41 can be reduced.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

  In the above embodiment, the present invention is applied to a slot machine in which bets are set using medals and credits as game values. However, slots for setting bets using game balls as game values are described. The present invention may be applied to a machine or a fully credit type slot machine that sets a bet amount using only credit as a gaming value. When using a game ball as a game value, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when 3 is set as the number of bets in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the use of only one of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, for example, a combination of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls. It may be. That is, it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using any of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of types of games such as medals and game balls when a winning occurs. You may apply the slot machine which can pay out all of utility values.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 41 Main control unit 91 Sub control unit

Claims (4)

A plurality of game variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable and deriving a game display result,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and the gaming display result is derived to all of the plurality of gaming variable display units. 1 is a slot machine in which one game is finished and a winning can be generated according to a combination of the display results for games derived to each of the plurality of game variable display sections as a result of one game,
Derivation operation means operated when deriving the game display result to the game variable display unit;
A game derivation control means for performing control to cause the game variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means to derive the game display result when the derivation operation means is operated;
A variable display unit for production capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and deriving a display result for production,
An effect derivation that controls the effect variable display part to derive the effect display result when a derivation operation means corresponding to a specific game variable display part among the plurality of game variable display parts is operated. Control means;
Special control means for executing special control that is not executed as control related to the game variable display unit while the game is in progress, as control related to the effect variable display unit during the game,
With
The positional relationship between the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit and the derivation operation means corresponding to the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit is a specific positional relationship. ,
The positional relationship between the effect variable display unit and the derivation operation means corresponding to the specific game variable display unit is the specific positional relationship,
The specific positional relationship between the specific game variable display unit and the derivation operation means corresponding to the specific game variable display unit is different from the specific positional relationship,
Of the game variable display units other than the specific game variable display unit, a first interval that is an interval between the game variable display unit adjacent to the game variable display unit and the game variable display unit; One of the game variable display units other than the specific game variable display unit and the one of the game variable display units other than the specific game variable display unit. The second interval, which is the interval between the display portion and another game variable display portion adjacent to the display portion, is the same or substantially the same.
The interval between the specific game variable display section and the game variable display section adjacent to the specific game variable display section or the presentation variable display section adjacent to the specific game variable display section. The slot machine is characterized in that an interval of 3 is different from the first interval and the second interval. A plurality of game variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable and deriving a game display result,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and the gaming display result is derived to all of the plurality of gaming variable display units. 1 is a slot machine in which one game is finished and a winning can be generated according to a combination of the display results for games derived to each of the plurality of game variable display sections as a result of one game,
Derivation operation means operated when deriving the game display result to the game variable display unit;
A game derivation control means for performing control to cause the game variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means to derive the game display result when the derivation operation means is operated;
A variable display unit for production capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and deriving a display result for production,
An effect derivation that controls the effect variable display part to derive the effect display result when a derivation operation means corresponding to a specific game variable display part among the plurality of game variable display parts is operated. Control means;
Special control means for executing special control that is not executed as control related to the game variable display unit while the game is in progress, as control related to the effect variable display unit during the game,
With
The positional relationship between the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit and the derivation operation means corresponding to the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit is a specific positional relationship. ,
The positional relationship between the effect variable display unit and the derivation operation means corresponding to the specific game variable display unit is the specific positional relationship,
The specific positional relationship between the specific game variable display unit and the derivation operation means corresponding to the specific game variable display unit is different from the specific positional relationship,
Of the game variable display parts other than the specific game variable display part, the first variable display part adjacent to the effect variable display part and the effect variable display part are first intervals. An interval between the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit and another game variable display unit adjacent to the game variable display unit and the game variable display unit. The second interval is the same or substantially the same,
A third interval that is an interval between the specific game variable display unit and the game variable display unit adjacent to the specific game variable display unit is the first interval and the second interval. A slot machine characterized by being different. A plurality of types of identification information that each can be identified are variably displayed, and a plurality of game variable display units capable of deriving a game display result, and identification information displayed on the plurality of game variable display units A variable display area for games that can be visually recognized,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and the gaming display result is derived to all of the plurality of gaming variable display units. 1 is a slot machine in which one game is finished and a winning can be generated according to a combination of the display results for games derived to each of the plurality of game variable display sections as a result of one game,
Derivation operation means operated when deriving the game display result to the game variable display unit;
A game derivation control means for performing control to cause the game variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means to derive the game display result when the derivation operation means is operated;
A variable display unit for production capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and deriving a display result for production,
A variable display area for effects in which the identification information displayed on the variable display for effects can be visually recognized;
An effect derivation that controls the effect variable display part to derive the effect display result when a derivation operation means corresponding to a specific game variable display part among the plurality of game variable display parts is operated. Control means;
Special control means for executing special control that is not executed as control related to the game variable display unit while the game is in progress, as control related to the effect variable display unit during the game,
With
The positional relationship between the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit and the derivation operation means corresponding to the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit is a specific positional relationship. ,
The positional relationship between the effect variable display unit and the derivation operation means corresponding to the specific game variable display unit is the specific positional relationship,
The specific positional relationship between the specific game variable display unit and the derivation operation means corresponding to the specific game variable display unit is different from the specific positional relationship,
Of the game variable display parts other than the specific game variable display part, the game variable table area corresponding to the game variable display part adjacent to the effect variable display part, and the effect variable display part A variable display area for production, a first interval that is an interval between the display, and a game variable display area corresponding to one of the game variable display parts other than the specific game variable display part; The game variable display area corresponding to the other game variable display part adjacent to the one game variable display part among the game variable display parts other than the specific game variable display part. The second interval is the same or substantially the same,
A game variable display area corresponding to the specific game variable display part, and a game variable display area corresponding to the game variable display part adjacent to the specific game variable display part or the specific game variable display. A slot machine characterized in that a third interval, which is an interval between an effect variable display area corresponding to an effect variable display section adjacent to the section, is different from the first interval and the second interval. A plurality of types of identification information that each can be identified are variably displayed, and a plurality of game variable display units capable of deriving a game display result, and identification information displayed on the plurality of game variable display units A variable display area for games that can be visually recognized,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and the gaming display result is derived to all of the plurality of gaming variable display units. 1 is a slot machine in which one game is finished and a winning can be generated according to a combination of the display results for games derived to each of the plurality of game variable display sections as a result of one game,
Derivation operation means operated when deriving the game display result to the game variable display unit;
A game derivation control means for performing control to cause the game variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means to derive the game display result when the derivation operation means is operated;
A variable display unit for production capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and deriving a display result for production,
A variable display area for effects in which the identification information displayed on the variable display for effects can be visually recognized;
An effect derivation that controls the effect variable display part to derive the effect display result when a derivation operation means corresponding to a specific game variable display part among the plurality of game variable display parts is operated. Control means;
Special control means for executing special control that is not executed as control related to the game variable display unit while the game is in progress, as control related to the effect variable display unit during the game,
With
The positional relationship between the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit and the derivation operation means corresponding to the game variable display unit other than the specific game variable display unit is a specific positional relationship. ,
The positional relationship between the effect variable display unit and the derivation operation means corresponding to the specific game variable display unit is the specific positional relationship,
The specific positional relationship between the specific game variable display unit and the derivation operation means corresponding to the specific game variable display unit is different from the specific positional relationship,
Among the game variable display parts other than the specific game variable display part, a game variable table area corresponding to one game variable display part adjacent to the effect variable display part, and the effect variable display part The first interval that is the interval between the corresponding effect variable display areas, and another game variable adjacent to the effect variable display portion of the game variable display portions other than the specific game variable display portion. The second interval, which is the interval between the game variable table area corresponding to the display unit and the effect variable display region corresponding to the effect variable display unit, is the same or substantially the same,
The third is an interval between the game variable display area corresponding to the specific game variable display part and the game variable display area corresponding to the game variable display part adjacent to the specific game variable display part. The slot machine is different from the first interval and the second interval.

Images